OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................
1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ......................................................

1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500 ......................................................
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A ....................................................
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B ....................................................
1-1
1-3
1-5
1-5
2 Cabinet ...........................................................................................................
2-1
2.1 Types......................................................................................................
2.2 Cabinet Configuration .............................................................................
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators ..........................................................................
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit ..................................................................
2.2.3 Other Configuration........................................................................
2.3 Technical Parameters ............................................................................
2-1
2-3
2-3
2-4
2-4
2-5
3 Subrack ..........................................................................................................
3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ...........................................................

3.1.1 Structure ........................................................................................
3.1.2 Slot Distribution ..............................................................................
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots .............................................
3.1.4 Technical Parameters ....................................................................
3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 ...........................................................
3.2.1 Structure ........................................................................................
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG ..................................................
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A .........................................................
3.4.1 Structure ........................................................................................
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B .........................................................
3.5.1 Structure ........................................................................................
3-1
3-1
3-3
3-4
3-9
3-9
3-9
3-11
3-13
3-17
3-18
3-19
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-23
3-24
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-31
4 Board Classification and List ......................................................................
4-1
4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................

4.1.1 SDH Boards ...................................................................................
4.1.2 PDH Boards ...................................................................................
4-1
4-1
4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................

4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards ...................................................
4.1.5 Other Boards ..................................................................................
4.2 Board Appearance .................................................................................
4-4
4-6
4-9
4-10
5 SDH Boards ...................................................................................................
5-1
5.1 SL64 .......................................................................................................

5.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration ................................................................
5.1.5 Version Description ........................................................................
5.2 SF16/SL16 .............................................................................................
5.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.2.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 .....................................................................................
5.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.3.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1 .....................................................................................
5.4.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.4.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1 ...........................................................
5.5.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.5.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5-1
5-1
5-2
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-5
5-7
5-7
5-8
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-15
5-15
5-16
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-19
5-21
5-22
5-22
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-26
5-27
5-28
5-29
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 ........................................................................

5.6.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
5.6.2 Principle .........................................................................................
5.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
5.6.4 Protection Configuration ................................................................
5-32
5-33
5-34
5-35
5-36
5-40
5-40
5-40
6 PDH Boards ...................................................................................................
6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 .................................................................................

6.1.2 Functionality ...................................................................................
6.1.3 Principle .........................................................................................
6.1.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S ...................................................................
6.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
6.2.2 Principle .........................................................................................
6.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B .................................................................
6.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
6.3.2 Principle .........................................................................................
6.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S ..............................................................................
6.4.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
6.4.2 Principle .........................................................................................
6.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
6-1
6-2
6-2
6-4
6-5
6-9
6-9
6-9
6-11
6-11
6-12
6-13
6-15
6-20
6-20
6-20
6-22
6-22
6-23
6-24
6-26
6-29
6-29
6-29
6-31
6-31
6-32
6-32
6-33
6-35
6-35
6-35
7 Data Processing Boards ..............................................................................
7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ...............................................................

7.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8 ....................................................
7.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.2.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7.3 EMR0/EGR2 ...........................................................................................
7.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.3.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1 ............................................................................................
7.4.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.4.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1 ..............................................................................................
7.5.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.5.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.5.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7-2
7-3
7-4
7-5
7-8
7-8
7-9
7-11
7-12
7-14
7-15
7-17
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-24
7-24
7-27
7-28
7-30
7-32
7-33
7-34
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-38
7-38
7-39
7-39
7-40
7-40
7-41
7-41
7-43
7-43
7-44
7-44
7.6 MST4 ......................................................................................................

7.6.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
7.6.2 Principle .........................................................................................
7.6.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
7-45
7-45
7-46
7-48
7-49
7-49
7-49
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..............................................
8-1
8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE .......................................................................

8.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
8.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................
8.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 ................................................................................
8.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
8.2.2 Principle .........................................................................................
8.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
8.3 SCC/GSCC ............................................................................................
8.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
8.3.2 Principle .........................................................................................
8.3.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
8.4 CRG .......................................................................................................
8.4.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
8.4.2 Principle .........................................................................................
8.4.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
8.4.4 Version Description........................................................................
8-2
8-2
8-3
8-4
8-6
8-7
8-7
8-9
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8-16
8-16
8-17
8-18
8-21
8-21
8-22
8-22
8-23
8-24
8-26
8-26
9 Other Boards .................................................................................................
9-1
9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................

9.1.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.1.2 Principle .........................................................................................
9-1
9-1
9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................

9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C ...............................................................................
9.2.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.2.2 Principle .........................................................................................
9.2.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.3 BA2/BPA ................................................................................................
9.3.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.3.2 Application .....................................................................................
9.3.3 Principle .........................................................................................
9.3.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.4 COA ........................................................................................................
9.4.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.4.2 Application .....................................................................................
9.4.3 Principle .........................................................................................
9.4.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.4.5 Installation ......................................................................................
9.4.6 Version Description. .......................................................................
9.5 DCU ........................................................................................................
9.5.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.5.2 Application .....................................................................................
9.5.3 Principle .........................................................................................
9.5.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI ...............................................................................
9.6.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX ............................................................................
9.6.3 Principle of EOW ............................................................................
9.6.4 Principle of SAP .............................................................................
9.6.5 Principle of SEI ..............................................................................
9.6.6 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation .....................................................................
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper .................................................................
9-3
9-5
9-5
9-7
9-7
9-8
9-9
9-11
9-11
9-12
9-12
9-12
9-13
9-14
9-15
9-15
9-16
9-17
9-17
9-18
9-19
9-22
9-23
9-23
9-25
9-25
9-25
9-26
9-26
9-28
9-28
9-30
9-30
9-33
9-33
9-34
9-35
9-36
9-44
9-46
9-46
9.6.10 Technical Parameters ..................................................................

9.7 PIU .........................................................................................................
9.7.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU .......................................................
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU ..........................................................................
9.7.4 Principle of R2PIU ..........................................................................
9.7.5 Front Pane .....................................................................................
9.8 UPM .......................................................................................................
9.8.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.8.2 Principle .........................................................................................
9.8.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9.8.4 Precautions ....................................................................................
9.9 FAN ........................................................................................................
9.9.1 Functionality ...................................................................................
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN ........................................................................
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN ........................................................................
9.9.4 Front Panel ....................................................................................
9-47
9-48
9-48
9-48
9-49
9-49
9-50
9-54
9-54
9-55
9-56
9-56
9-57
9-58
9-58
9-59
9-60
9-60
9-61
9-61
9-62
9-62
10 Cables ..........................................................................................................
10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................

10.1.1 Classification ................................................................................
10.1.2 Connector ....................................................................................
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable......................................................
10.2.1 Cabinet -48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable ...................................
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable ....................................................
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable ..................................................................
10.2.4 Equipment -48 V/-60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable ...
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable ...............................................................
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable .......................................................................
10.3 Alarm Cable..........................................................................................
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable ...............................................................
10.3.2 Indicator/ Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN
Subracks .................................................................................................
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and
Other Subrack .........................................................................................
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/ Output Cable ...................................
10.4 Management Cable ..............................................................................
10-1
10-1
10-2
10-5
10-5
10-7
10-8
10-9
10-11
10-12
10-14
10-14
10-15
10-17
10-18
10-21
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable .................................................................

10.4.2 Serial 1-4/F&f Cable.....................................................................
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable......................................................
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire ...........................................................
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable ...........................................................
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable ................................................................
10.4.7 Crossover Cable ..........................................................................
10.5 Signal Cable .........................................................................................
10.5.1 75ohm 8xE1 Cable ......................................................................
10.5.2 75ohm 16xE1 Cable ....................................................................
10.5.3 120ohm 8xE1 Cable ....................................................................
10.5.4 120ohm 16xE1 Cable ..................................................................
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable ..................................................................
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable .............................
10.6 Clock Cable ..........................................................................................
10.6.1 Clock Cable ..................................................................................
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable ...............................................
10-21
10-22
10-24
10-25
10-26
10-27
10-29
10-31
10-31
10-33
10-35
10-37
10-39
10-41
10-43
10-43
10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board .......................................
A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description .................................................................

A.2 Board Indicator Description ....................................................................
A-1
A-2
B Board Version Description ..........................................................................
B-1
B.1 Board Version List ..................................................................................

B.2 Version Description ................................................................................
B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board ..........................................................
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board............................................................
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards ...................................................
B.2.4 Other Boards .................................................................................
B-1
B-4
B-4
B-5
B-7
B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................
C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms .....................................................................
D-1
Index .................................................................................................................
HUAWEI
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Intelligent Optical Transmission System
Hardware Description Manual
V100R003
Huawei Technologies Proprietary
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

System
Manual Version
T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31
Product Version
V100R003
BOM
31250390
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. provides customers with comprehensive technical support and service.
Please feel free to contact our local office or company headquarters.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Administration Building, Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.,
Bantian, Longgang District, Shenzhen, P. R. China
Postal Code: 518129
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

All Rights Reserved
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means
without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks
, HUAWEI, C&C08, EAST8000, HONET,
, ViewPoint, INtess, ETS, DMC,
TELLIN, InfoLink, Netkey, Quidway, SYNLOCK, Radium, M900/M1800,
TELESIGHT, Quidview, Musa, Airbridge, Tellwin, Inmedia, VRP, DOPRA, iTELLIN,
HUAWEIOptiX, C&C08 iNET, NETENGINE, OptiX, iSite, U-SYS, iMUSE, OpenEye,
Lansway, SmartAX, infoX, TopEng are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this manual are the property of their
respective holders.
Notice
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has
been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but
all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute
the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Summary of Updates
This section provides the update history of this manual and introduces the updates of
contents.
Update History
Manual Version
Notes
T2-042587-20040215-C-1.10
Initial field trial release
T2-042586-20040501-C-1.11
The manual style is modified.
T2-042552-20041026-C-1.20
Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,

MST4, LMST4, UXCS, XCE, LWX, and MR2A are added.
T2-042552-20050228-C-1.21
Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.
T2-042590-20050820-C-1.30
1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN

3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are
combined into one.
2. The descriptions of the CRG, PIU, PL3A, R1SL4,
R1SLD4, R1SL1, R1SLQ1and MST4 boards are added.
3. The manual is reorganized. The boards are described
in several chapters.
T2-042590-20051020-C-1.31
Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete

the description of the N1SL64 and N1SF64 board. Update the
weight of the ETSI cabinet and the power consumption of the
boards.
Updates of Contents
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document
version contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Manual Version 1.31

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete the description of the
N1SL64 and N1SF64 board.

The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and
OptiX OSN 1500 are combined into one. The manual is reorganized. Chapter 4 of the
original manual is divided into 6 chapters (chapter 4 to chapter 9).
Chapter 1 Equipment Architecture
Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A
and OptiX OSN 1500B respectively.
Chapter 2 Cabinet
Introduces the cabinet used by OptiX OSN series products.
Chapter 3 Subrack
Introduces the subrack structure and board configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500REG, OptiX OSN 1500A and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Chapter 4 Board Classification and List
This is a new chapter, which introduces board classification and gives a list of boards.
The subsequent chapters (chapter 5chapter 9) give detailed descriptions.
Chapter 5 SDH Boards
The descriptions of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SL1 and R1SLQ1 are added.
Chapter 6 PDH Boards
The descriptions of the PL3A is added.
Chapter 7 Data Processing Boards
The descriptions of the N3EFS0, N3EGS2 and N3EFS4 are added.
Chapter 8 Cross-connect and SCC Boards
The descriptions of the CRG is added.
Chapter 9 Other Boards
The descriptions of the PIU and FANA are added.
Appendix B Board Version Description
It is newly added, introducing version characteristics of all boards of the OptiX OSN
series products and their differences.

Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards ETS8, SF64 and COA are added in the table 3-2.
Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: ETS8, SF64 and COA.
The detailed descriptions of following boards are modified and improved:
EGS2/EFS0/EFS4.
Chapter 5 Cables
Classification and descriptions of cables are improved.

Chapter 3 Subrack
The boards EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1, MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS are
added in the table 3-2.
Chapter 4 Boards
The detailed descriptions of following boards are added: EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,
MR2A, LWX, EGT2, XCE and UXCS.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
Contents
1 Equipment Architecture
1-1
1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
1-1
1-3
1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A
1-5
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B
1-5
2 Cabinet
2-1
2.1 Types
2-1
2.2 Cabinet Configuration
2-3
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators
2-3
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit
2-4
2.2.3 Other Configuration
2-4
2.3 Technical Parameters
2-5
3 Subrack
3-1
3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-1
3.1.1 Structure
3-1
3.1.2 Slot Distribution
3-3
3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots
3-4
3.1.4 Technical Parameters
3-9
3-9
3.2.1 Structure
3-9
3-11
3-13
3-17
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
3-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-19
3.4.1 Structure
3-19
3-19
3-20
3-23
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-24
3.5.1 Structure
3-24
3-25
3-27
3-31
4 Board Classification and List
4-1
4.1 Board Classification
4-1
4.1.1 SDH Boards
4-1
4.1.2 PDH Boards
4-3
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards
4-4
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards
4-6
4.1.5 Other Boards
4-9
4.2 Board Appearance
4-10
5 SDH Boards
5-1
5.1 SL64
5-1
5.1.1 Functionality
5-1
5.1.2 Principle
5-2
5.1.3 Front Panel
5-4
5.1.4 Parameter Configuration
5-5
5.1.5 Version Description
5-5
5-5
5.2 SF16/SL16
5-7
5.2.1 Functionality
5-7
5.2.2 Principle
5-8
5.2.3 Front Panel
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-12
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-15
5.3.1 Functionality
5-15
5.3.2 Principle
5-16
ii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
5.3.3 Front Panel
5-17
5-18
5-19
5-19
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1
5-21
5.4.1 Functionality
5-22
5.4.2 Principle
5-22
5.4.3 Front Panel
5-24
5-25
5-25
5-26
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1
5-27
5.5.1 Functionality
5-28
5.5.2 Principle
5-29
5.5.3 Front Panel
5-29
5-30
5-31
5-31
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8
5-32
5.6.1 Functionality
5-33
5.6.2 Principle
5-34
5.6.3 Front Panel
5-35
5.6.4 Protection Configuration
5-36
5-40
5-40
5-40
6 PDH Boards
6-1
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
6-1
6.1.2 Functionality
6-2
6.1.3 Principle
6-2
6.1.4 Front Panel
6-4
6-5
6-9
6-9
6-9
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
6-11
iii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
6.2.1 Functionality
6-11
6.2.2 Principle
6-12
6.2.3 Front Panel
6-13
6-15
6-20
6-20
6-20
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
6-22
6.3.1 Functionality
6-22
6.3.2 Principle
6-23
6.3.3 Front Panel
6-24
6-26
6-29
6-29
6-29
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
6-31
6.4.1 Functionality
6-31
6.4.2 Principle
6-32
6.4.3 Front Panel
6-32
6-33
6-35
6-35
6-35
7 Data Processing Boards
7-1
7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-2
7.1.1 Functionality
7-3
7.1.2 Principle
7-4
7.1.3 Front Panel
7-5
7-8
7-8
7-9
7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
7-11
7.2.1 Functionality
7-12
7.2.2 Principle
7-14
7.2.3 Front Panel
7-15
7-17
iv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
7-19
7-20
7-21
7.3 EMR0/EGR2
7-24
7.3.1 Functionality
7-24
7.3.2 Principle
7-27
7.3.3 Front Panel
7-28
7-30
7-32
7-33
7.4 ADL4/ADQ1
7-34
7.4.1 Functionality
7-34
7.4.2 Principle
7-35
7.4.3 Front Panel
7-36
7-38
7-38
7-39
7-39
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1
7-40
7.5.1 Functionality
7-40
7.5.2 Principle
7-41
7.5.3 Front Panel
7-41
7-43
7-43
7-44
7-44
7.6 MST4
7-45
7.6.1 Functionality
7-45
7.6.2 Principle
7-46
7.6.3 Front Panel
7-48
7-49
7-49
7-49
8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE
8-1
8-2
8.1.1 Functionality
8-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
8.1.2 Principle
8-3
8.1.3 Front Panel
8-4
8-6
8-7
8-7
8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16
8-9
8.2.1 Functionality
8-9
8.2.2 Principle
8-10
8.2.3 Front Panel
8-11
8-13
8-13
8-14
8-14
8.3 SCC/GSCC
8-16
8.3.1 Functionality
8-16
8.3.2 Principle
8-17
8.3.3 Front Panel
8-18
8-21
8-21
8.4 CRG
8-22
8.4.1 Functionality
8-22
8.4.2 Principle
8-23
8.4.3 Front Panel
8-24
8-26
8-26
9 Other Boards
9-1
9.1 LWX
9-1
9.1.1 Functionality
9-1
9.1.2 Principle
9-2
9.1.3 Front Panel
9-3
9-5
9-5
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-7
9.2.1 Functionality
9-7
9.2.2 Principle
9-8
9.2.3 Front Panel
9-9
vi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
9-11
9-11
9.3 BA2/BPA
9-12
9.3.1 Functionality
9-12
9.3.2 Application
9-12
9.3.3 Principle
9-13
9.3.4 Front Panel
9-14
9-15
9-15
9.4 COA
9-16
9.4.1 Functionality
9-17
9.4.2 Application
9-17
9.4.3 Principle
9-18
9.4.4 Front Panel
9-19
9.4.5 Installation
9-22
9.4.6 Version Description.
9-23
9-23
9.5 DCU
9-25
9.5.1 Functionality
9-25
9.5.2 Application
9-25
9.5.3 Principle
9-26
9.5.4 Front Panel
9-26
9-28
9-28
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI
9-30
9.6.1 Functionality
9-30
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX
9-33
9.6.3 Principle of EOW
9-33
9.6.4 Principle of SAP
9-34
9.6.5 Principle of SEI
9-35
9.6.6 Front Panel
9-36
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation
9-44
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper
9-46
9-46
9-47
9.7 PIU
9-48
9.7.1 Functionality
9-48
vii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU
9-48
9.7.3 Principle of R1PIU
9-49
9-49
9.7.5 Front Pane
9-50
9-54
9-54
9.8 UPM
9-55
9.8.1 Functionality
9-56
9.8.2 Principle
9-56
9.8.3 Front Panel
9-57
9.8.4 Precautions
9-58
9-58
9.9 FAN
9-59
9.9.1 Functionality
9-60
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN
9-60
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN
9-61
9.9.4 Front Panel
9-61
9-62
9-62
10 Cables
10-1
10.1 Fiber Jumper
10-1
10.1.1 Classification
10-1
10.1.2 Connector
10-2
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable
10-5
10.2.1 Cabinet 48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable
10-5
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable
10-7
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable
10-8
10.2.4 Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable
10-9
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable
10-11
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable
10-12
10.3 Alarm Cable
10-14
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable
10-14
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks
10-15
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack
10-17
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable
10-18
10.4 Management Cable
10-21
viii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Contents
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable
10-21
10.4.2 Serial 14/F&f Cable
10-22
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable
10-24
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire
10-25
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable
10-26
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable
10-27
10.4.7 Crossover Cable
10-29
10.5 Signal Cable
10-31
10.5.1 75 8xE1 Cable
10-31
10.5.2 75 16xE1 Cable
10-33
10.5.3 120 8xE1 Cable
10-35
10.5.4 120 16xE1 Cable
10-37
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable
10-39
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable
10-41
10.6 Clock Cable
10-43
10.6.1 Clock Cable
10-43
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable
10-45
A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board
A-1
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description
A-1
A.2 Board Indicator Description
A-2
B Board Version Description
B-1
B.1 Board Version List
B-1
B.2 Version Description
B-4
B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board
B-4
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board
B-5
B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
B-7
B.2.4 Other Boards
B-8
C Power Consumption and Weight
C-1
D Abbreviations and Acronyms
D-1
ix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figures
Figures
Figure 1-1 The OptiX OSN 3500
1-1
Figure 1-2 Components and architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500
1-2
1-3
1-4
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1-5
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B
1-5
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet
2-2
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2-3
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
2-4
Figure 3-1 Structure of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
3-2
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
3-3
3-10
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
3-11
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
3-11
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
3-12
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
3-12
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-19
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)
3-19
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
3-20
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-20
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-24
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
3-25
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
3-25
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
3-26
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
3-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figures
Figure 4-1 Board appearance
4-11
Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64
5-3
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
5-4
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
5-9
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16
5-10
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-16
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4
5-18
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-23
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-24
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
5-29
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1
5-29
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1
5-34
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-35
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-37
Figure 5-14 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-38
5-39
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
5-39
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4
6-3
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
6-4
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-6
Figure 6-4 Board distribution upon two-group 1:3 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-7
6-8
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-8
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
6-12
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals
6-13
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
6-14
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-16
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-18
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
6-19
Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-20
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM
6-23
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals
6-24
Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-25
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-27
Figure 6-18 Slot assignment upon 1:8 protection for the PQ1/PQM in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-28
6-29
xi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figures
Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S
6-32
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-34
Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1
6-35
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
7-5
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-6
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
7-14
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-15
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
7-18
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
7-19
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500
7-19
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
7-27
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
7-29
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-35
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-37
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-42
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
7-47
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
7-48
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS
8-3
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-4
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks
8-6
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8-11
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-11
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC
8-17
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
8-18
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC
8-19
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
8-23
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
8-24
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX
9-2
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
9-4
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
9-8
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9-8
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-9
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
9-10
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network
9-13
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA
9-13
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA
9-14
xii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figures
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)
9-16
Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA
9-17
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)
9-18
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA
9-18
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA
9-19
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA
9-19
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector
9-20
Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC
9-21
Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
9-23
Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system
9-25
Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU
9-26
Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU
9-27
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX
9-33
Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW
9-34
Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
9-34
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP
9-35
Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI
9-36
Figure 9-27 Connection of alarm input and alarm output (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-45
9-45
Figure 9-29 Connection of cabinet alarm indicators (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-46
9-46
Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU
9-48
Figure 9-32 Functional block diagram of the R1PIU
9-49
9-50
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU
9-51
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU
9-51
Figure 9-36 Front panel of the R1PIU
9-52
9-53
Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box
9-55
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box
9-57
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)
9-59
Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN
9-60
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN
9-61
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN
9-62
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface
10-3
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface
10-4
xiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figures
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface
10-4
Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface
10-5
Figure 10-5 48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
10-6
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable
10-6
Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
10-7
Figure 10-8 Structure of the subrack power cable
10-8
Figure 10-9 Structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable
10-9
Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable
10-10
Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable
10-11
10-12
Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
10-14
Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks
10-16
Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
10-17
Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable
10-19
Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
10-21
Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 14/F&f cable
10-23
Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
10-24
Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire
10-25
Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable
10-27
Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable
10-28
Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable
10-29
Figure 10-24 Structure of the 75 8xE1 cable
10-31
10-33
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 8 x E1 cable
10-36
10-37
Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
10-40
Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable
10-41
Figure 10-30 Structure of the 75 clock cable
10-44
10-44
Figure 10-32 Structure of the 1-channel 120 /75 clock transfer cable
10-45
10-46
xiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Tables
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
2-1
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
2-3
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
2-4
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
2-5
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500
3-3
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s cross-connect
capacity)
3-4
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s cross-connect
capacity)
3-6
Table 3-4 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-7
Table 3-5 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500
3-8
Table 3-6 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
3-9
Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-13
Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
3-13
3-16
3-16
3-17
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
3-18
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-21
Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-22
Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
3-23
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-27
Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-27
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-29
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-30
Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
3-31
xv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Table 4-1 SDH boards
4-2
Table 4-2 PDH boards
4-3
Table 4-3 Data processing boards
4-5
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
4-7
Table 4-5 Other boards
4-9
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
5-1
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
5-5
Table 5-3 Technical parameters of the SL64
5-5
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
5-6
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
5-7
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16
5-11
5-12
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16
5-13
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
5-14
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
5-15
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
5-19
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
5-19
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
5-21
Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
5-25
Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
5-26
Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
5-27
Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
5-30
Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
5-31
Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-32
Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1
5-32
Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08
5-36
Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1
5-36
Table 5-23 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
5-38
5-39
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
5-40
Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
5-40
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
5-41
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
6-1
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04
6-5
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
6-5
Table 6-4 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-7
xvi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
6-8
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-9
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
6-9
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04
6-10
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
6-11
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S
6-15
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3
6-15
Table 6-12 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:3 TPS in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-17
Table 6-13 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
6-18
6-18
6-19
Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-19
Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN
1500B
6-20
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
6-21
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-22
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM
6-22
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-25
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
6-26
6-27
6-28
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-29
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
6-29
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-31
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-33
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
6-33
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
6-34
Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
6-35
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
6-36
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-2
Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2
7-7
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
7-7
Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-7
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4
7-8
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
7-9
xvii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
7-11
Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2
7-16
Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-16
Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0
7-17
Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
7-18
Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
7-20
Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards
7-21
Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
7-22
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
7-24
Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2
7-30
Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2
7-30
Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
7-31
Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2
7-32
Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
7-33
Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-34
Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1
7-38
Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
7-39
Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-40
Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
7-43
Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1
7-43
Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
7-44
Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4
7-45
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
7-46
Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4
7-49
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
8-2
Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-5
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
8-6
Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
8-7
Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
8-7
Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-9
Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-12
Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL
8-13
Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type
8-14
Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
8-14
Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC
8-19
Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC
8-20
xviii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC
8-21
Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG
8-24
Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG
8-25
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
8-26
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
9-1
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX
9-4
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
9-5
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
9-6
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX
9-6
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
9-7
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-10
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
9-11
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA
9-12
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
9-15
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA
9-20
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin
9-21
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA
9-23
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU
9-28
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
9-30
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX
9-36
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX
9-37
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface
9-38
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface
9-38
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface
9-38
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface
9-39
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface
9-39
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface
9-39
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface
9-40
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface
9-40
Table 9-26 Pin assignment of ALMI1 interface
9-40
9-41
9-41
9-41
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel
9-42
Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW
9-42
Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW
9-43
xix
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP
9-43
Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI
9-43
Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting
9-46
Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
9-47
Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel
9-51
Table 9-38 Interfaces of the Q1PIU
9-52
Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU
9-52
9-52
Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel
9-53
Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU
9-54
Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box
9-57
Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel
9-57
Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM
9-58
Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN
9-61
Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN
9-62
Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN
9-62
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper
10-2
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector
10-3
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables
10-5
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
10-8
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable
10-10
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable
10-12
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable
10-13
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable
10-14
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable
10-15
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
10-16
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
10-18
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500
10-19
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500
10-20
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables
10-21
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
10-22
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 14/F&f cable
10-23
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
10-25
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
10-26
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
10-27
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
10-28
xx
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Tables
Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable
10-29
Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables
10-31
Table 10-23 Pin assignment of the 75 8xE1 cable
10-32
10-33
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 8 x E1 cable
10-36
10-38
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
10-42
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables
10-43
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 clock cable
10-44
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 /120 clock transfer cable
10-46
Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards
B-5
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version
B-5
Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards
B-6
Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
B-7
Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC
B-7
Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards
B-8
Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN
B-8
xxi
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

About This Manual
About This Manual

Release Notes
This manual covers:
The OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System, version V100R003
Related Manuals
The following table shows the manuals of the OptiX OSN 3500, OSN 2500, and OSN
1500.
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Documentation Guide

OptiX OSN 3500 Intelligent
Optical Transmission System
Technical Manual System
Description

Description

Description

Installation Manual

Installation Manual

Installation Manual

Electronic Documentation



Technical Manual Networking
and Application

and Application

and Application
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Hardware Description Manual
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Routine
Maintenance

xxii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

OptiX OSN 3500
About This Manual

OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual

Troubleshooting
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Maintenance Manual Alarm and
Performance Event
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Commissioning Guide
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Configuration Guide
Note: The manual name with OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 indicates that the manual is shared by the
OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
Main points of the manuals for the OptiX OSN series products are as follows.
Documentation Guide
Introduces the contents and usage of the manuals.
Technical Manual System Description

Introduces the functionality, structure, performance, specifications, and theory of
the product.
Technical Manual Networking and Application

Introduces the networking, protection, and application of the product.

Introduces the hardware of the product, including the cabinet, subrack, power, fan,
board, and a variety of interfaces.
Maintenance Manual Routine Maintenance

Introduces the main items and precautions involved in routing maintenance.
Maintenance Troubleshooting
Guides the analysis and troubleshooting of common faults.
Maintenance Alarm and Performance Event

Guides the way of processing alarms and performance events.
Installation Manual
Guides the on-site installation of the product, covering the installation of cabinet,
subrack and components, and grounding specifications.
Commissioning Guide
Introduces the equipment commissioning process, including indices of hardware,
software, and service operation.
Configuration Guide
Introduces the way and procedures of configuring SDH services, Ethernet private
line services, Ethernet LAN services, RPR services, and ATM services on the
T2000.
Electronic Documentation (CD-ROM)

Covers all the preceding manuals. Acrobat Reader is attached.
Organization
The manual is organized as follows.

xxiii
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

About This Manual
Chapter
Description
Chapter 1 Equipment
Architecture
Introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX

OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.
Chapter 2 Cabinet
Describes the dimensions, appearance, and technical

specifications of the cabinets used by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500, and the
configuration in the cabinets.
Chapter 3 Subrack
Introduces the structure of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN

2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 subracks. Lists the board types
that can seat in the slots of the subracks.
Chapter 4 Board
Classification and List
Classifies the boards into SDH boards, PDH boards, data

processing boards, cross-connect and SCC boards, and
other boards, and gives a detailed list of all available boards.
Chapter 5 SDH Boards
Introduces SDH boards in terms of functionality, principle,

front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 6 PDH Boards
Introduces PDH boards in terms of functionality, principle,

front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
Chapter 7 Data
Processing Boards
Introduces data processing boards in terms of functionality,

principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board
protection, version description, and technical parameters.
Chapter 8
Cross-Connect and
System Control Boards
Introduces cross-connect and SCC boards in terms of

functionality, principle, front panel, DIP switch, interfaces,
board protection, version description, and technical
parameters.
Chapter 9 Other Boards
Introduces other boards (for example, the system auxiliary

interface board) in terms of functionality, principle, front
panel, DIP switch, interfaces, board protection, version
Chapter 10 Cables
Introduces the external and the internal cables of the OptiX

OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, and
gives detailed description in terms of the structure,
appearance, pin assignment, and technical parameters.
Appendix AAppendix D
Includes four appendices:

Appendix A Quick Reference for Indicators
Appendix B Power Consumption and Weight of Boards
Appendix C Board Version Configuration
Appendix D Abbreviations and Acronyms
The appendices give a quick searching to equipment-related
information during routine maintenance.
Readers can locate the chapter where required information
is covered through appendices quickly.

xxiv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

About This Manual
Intended Audience
This manual is intended for:
Network administrator
Maintenance engineer
Provisioning engineer
Conventions
The manual uses the following conventions.
Symbol Conventions
Symbol
Description
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates high voltage could result
in harm to person.
Warning
A warning notice with this symbol indicates strong laser beam could
result in personal injury.
A warning notice with this symbol indicates a risk of personal injury.
Warning
Caution
A caution notice with this symbol indicates a risk to equipment

damage or loss of data.
Caution
A caution notice with this symbol indicates the equipment is

static-sensitive.
Important
Note
An important note notice with this symbol helps you avoid an

undesirable situation or indicates important supplementary
information.
Note
A note notice with this symbol indicates additional, helpful,

non-critical information.
GUI Conventions
Convention
Description
<>
Button name are inside angle brackets. For example, click the <OK>
button
[]
Window names, menu items, data table and field names are inside
square brackets. For example, pop up the [New User] window.
Multi-level menus are separated by forward slashes. For example,

[File/Create/Folder].

xxv
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Equipment Architecture
This chapter introduces the architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

Figure 1-1 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 3500.
The OptiX OSN 3500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet.
1-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Figure 1-2 shows the components when the equipment seating in a 300-mm deep
ETSI cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 3500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit,
subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.
1
1. Cabinet
4. Fixing frame for order wire
2. Power distribution unit

5. Lower subrack

1-2
3. Upper subrack
6. Side panel
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Figure 1-3 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 2500.
The OptiX OSN 2500 can be seated in a 300-mm or 600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, or in
a standard 19-inch cabinet. Figure 1-4 shows the components when the equipment
seating in a 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet.
The OptiX OSN 2500 is composed of cabinet, side panel, power distribution unit,
subrack, fixing frame for order wire, boards, and cables.

1-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7
3
1. Cabinet
5. Middle subrack

6. Lower subrack
3. Upper subrack
7. Side panel

1-4
4. Fixing frame for order wire
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500A is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or
600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall.
Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Figure 1-5 The OptiX OSN 1500A
1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

The OptiX OSN 1500B is a case-shape equipment. It can be seated in a 300-mm or
600-mm deep ETSI cabinet, a standard 19-inch cabinet, or be hanged on the wall.
Figure 1-6 shows the appearance of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Figure 1-6 The OptiX OSN 1500B

1-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2 Cabinet
Cabinet
This chapter introduces the dimensions, technical specifications, and the

configuration of the cabinet equipped by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, or OptiX OSN 1500B.
2.1 Types
Table 2-1 shows the cabinets that can house the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 2-1 Types of the cabinets for OptiX OSN products
Cabinet
ETSI
300-mm deep
ETSI
600-mm deep
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500A
OptiX OSN 1500B
Product
19-inch
cabinet
Notes: These cabinets should be provided by Huawei.

Figure 2-1 shows the appearance of the ETSI cabinet.

2-1
Access
network
cabinet
Hanging
9
9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2 Cabinet
Figure 2-1 The 300-mm deep ETSI cabinet

2-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2 Cabinet
2.2 Cabinet Configuration

There are indicators and a power distribution unit on the top of ETSI cabinet, as shown
in Figure 2-2.
1
2
Power Critical MajorMinor
Power distribution unit
1. Cabinet indicators
Figure 2-2 The ETSI cabinet configuration
2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

Table 2-2 shows the description of cabinet indicators.
Table 2-2 Description of ETSI cabinet indicators
Indicator
Status
Description
Power indicator - Power

(green)
On
The equipment is powered on.
Off
The equipment is not powered on.
On
There are critical alarms.
Off
There are no critical alarms.
On
There are major alarms.
Off
There are no major alarms.
On
There are minor alarms.
Off
There are no minor alarms.
Critical alarm indicator - Critical

(red)
Major alarm indicator - Major
(orange)
Minor alarm indicator - Minor
(yellow)
Note: The cabinet indicators are driven by subrack, so you should connect the cable properly and power on
the subrack first.

2-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2 Cabinet
2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

Figure 2-3 shows the power distribution unit.
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
INPUT
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A
1. Grounding stud
3. RTN1(+)
5. NEG1()
7. Left output cable terminal
SW1/20A SW2/20A SW3/20A SW4/20A
2. PGND
4. RTN2(+)
6. NEG2()
8. Right output cable terminal
Figure 2-3 The power distribution unit
To the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500A, the left output
cable terminal feeds power to the PIU board on the left side of the subrack, and the
right output cable terminal to that on the right side of the subrack. Table 2-3 reflects the
mapping relation between the terminals and PIU boards.
Table 2-3 Mapping relation between terminals and PIU boards
Left
terminal
Connected to
Right
terminal
Connected to
The PIU board on the left of

the first subrack
The PIU board on the right of

the first subrack

the second subrack

the second subrack

the third subrack

the third subrack

the fourth subrack

the fourth subrack
Note: To the OptiX OSN 3500, only terminal 1 and terminal 2 are in use normally. Terminals 3
and 4 can feed power to other equipment, such as COA.
To the OptiX OSN 1500B, the left output cable terminal feeds power to the upper PIU
board of the subrack, and the right output cable terminal to the lower PIU board of the
subrack.
2.2.3 Other Configuration

The cabinet can also house other external case-shape devices.
Uninterruptible power modules (UPM)
The UPM numbered GIE4805S can feed power to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX
OSN 1500 directly. The UPM converts the 220 V AC into 48 V DC, thus providing
2-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2 Cabinet
power for equipment without 48 V DC feeding and for storage battery when required.
Case-shape optical amplifier (COA)
The OptiX OSN 3500 and the OptiX OSN 2500 can be configured with two COA at
most. The OptiX OSN 1500 can be configured with one COA.
Tone & Data access unit (TDA)
Fiber spooling frame: spooling redundancy fibers inside the cabinet
HUB
2.3 Technical Parameters

Table 2-4 shows the technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet.
Table 2-4 Technical parameters of the ETSI cabinet
Dimensions (mm)
Weight
(kg)
OSN 3500
subracks
housed
OSN 2500
subracks
housed
OSN 1500
subracks
housed
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2000 (H)
55
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2000 (H)
79
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2200 (H)
60
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2200 (H)
84
Up to the
cabinet
capacity and
the number of
available
power
supplies
600 (W) x 300 (D) x 2600 (H)
70
600 (W) x 600 (D) x 2600 (H)
94

2-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Subrack
This chapter introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the
subrack of:
The OptiX OSN 3500
The OptiX OSN 2500
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG
The OptiX OSN 1500A
The OptiX OSN 1500B

This section introduces the structure, slot distribution, and technical parameters of the
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack.
3.1.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into board
area, fan area, and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.

3-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
1. Board area
2. Fan area
3. Fiber routing area
Board area: housing all boards of the OptiX OSN 3500
Fan area: housing three fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
Fiber routing area: for fiber routing

3-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack

The subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two layers. The upper layer gives 19 slots for
interface boards. The lower layer gives 18 slots for processing boards. Figure 3-2
shows the slot distribution.
S
L
O
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
3
S
L
O
T
2
4
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
7
S
L
O
T
2
8
P
I
U
P
I
U
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
3
6
S
L
O
T
3
7
A
U
X
FAN
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
9
S
L
O
T
1
0
X
C
S
X
C
S
FAN
S
L
O
T
1
1
S
L
O
T
1
2
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
S
L
O
T
1
7
S
L
O
T
1
8
S S
C C
C C
Fiber Routing
Figure 3-2 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 3500
1. Slots for Interface Boards
Service interface boards: slots 1926, slots 2936
2. Slots for Processing Boards
Service processing boards: slots 18 and slots 1117
3. Slots for Other Boards
XCS boards: slots 910
SCC boards: slots 1718 (Slot 17 can also hold a service processing board)
Power interface boards: slot 27 and slot 28
Auxiliary interface boards: slot 37
4. Slot Mapping Table
Table 3-1 shows the slot mapping table which associates slots for processing boards
to the slots for its corresponding interface boards.
Table 3-1 Slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500
Slot for
processing
boards
Slots for
corresponding
interface boards
Slot for
processing
boards
Slots for corresponding

interface boards
Slot 2
Slots 19, 20
Slot 3
Slots 21, 22

3-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Slot 4
Slots 23, 24
Slot 5
Slots 25, 26
Slot 13
Slots 29, 30
Slot 14
Slots 31, 32
Slot 15
Slots 33, 34
Slot 16
Slots 35, 36

1. Processing Boards
The OptiX OSN 3500 offers an 80 Gbit/s or 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity

depending on the type of cross-connect boards. Table 3-2 and Table 3-3 associate
processing boards to the corresponding slots under the two cross-connect
configurations.
N1SF16,
N1/N2SL16(A)
N1/N2SLQ4
N1/N2SLD4,
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1
N1SLT1 (Note
1)
N1SEP (Note 2)
N1SEP1 (Note
2)
Slot 2slot 5,
slot 13slot
16
Slot 17
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 13slot
14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Slot 15slot
16 (1.25
Gbit/s )
Slot 11slot
12 (10 Gbit/s)
N2SL64
Slot 7slot 8
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 5slot 6
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Boards
Slot 2slot 4
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
Slot 1
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Table 3-2 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity)
9
9
N1/N2SPQ4,
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A
N1PQ1,
N1PQM
N1EFS4
9
9
9
9
N1/N2EFS0

3-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

N1EFT8work
with interface
boards
N1EFT8 (led
out from front
panel)
Slot 2slot 5,
slot 13slot
16
Slot 11slot
12 (10 Gbit/s)
Slot 17
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 7slot 8
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 13slot
14 (2.5
Gbit/s)
Slot 15slot
16 (1.25
Gbit/s )
Slot 5slot 6
(2.5 Gbit/s)
N1/N2EGS2,
N1EGT2,
N1/N2EGR2
Slot 2slot 4
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Slot 1
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
3 Subrack
N1/N2EMR0
(work with
interface
boards)
N1/N2EMR0
(led out from
front panel)
N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1,
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4 (Note
3)
N1MR2A
N1LWX
N1DCU,
N1BA2, N1BPA
N1MR2C (Note
4)
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 112 optical interfaces.
Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as SEP when
working with interface boards.
Note 3: The maximum bandwidth at SDH side for the N1ADL4, N1ADQ1, N1IDL4, and N1IDQ1 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1926 or slots 2936.

3-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
N1SF16,
N1/N2SL16(A)
N1/N2SLQ4,
N1/N2SLD4
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note
1)
9
9
only in
slot 6
only in
slot
13
N1/N2SPQ4,
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A
N1PQ1,
N1PQM
N1EFS4
9
9
9
9
N1/N2EFS0
N1/N2EGS2,
N1EGT2,
N1/N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (work
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (led
out from front
panel)
Slot 2slot 5,
slot 13slot6
N1SEP (Note 2)
N1SEP1 (Note
2)
Slot 17
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 14slot 16
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 12slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(10 Gbit/s)
N2SL64
Slot 8
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 6slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Boards
Slot 2slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
Slot 1
(622 Mbit/s )
Table 3-3 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 3500 (40 Gbit/s
cross-connect capacity)
only in
slot
13
9
only in
slot 6
only in
slot
13
N1/N2EMR0
(work with
interface
boards)

3-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1 (Note
3)
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4 (Note
3)
N1MR2A
N1LWX
N1DCU,
N1BA2, N1BPA
Slot 2slot 5,
slot 13slot6
only in
slot
13
Slot 17
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 14slot 16
(622 Mbit/s )
only in
slot 6
Slot 12slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
(10 Gbit/s)
Slot 6slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
N1/N2EMR0
(led out from
front panel)
Slot 2slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
Boards
Slot 1
(622 Mbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
3 Subrack
N1MR2C (Note
4)
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 3500 provides 112 optical interfaces.
Note 2: On the T2000, the SEP1 is displayed as SEP1 when led out directly from the front panel, or displayed as
SEP when working with interface boards.
2. Interface Boards
Table 3-4 associates interface boards to the corresponding slots.
N1EU08
(Note)
N1OU08
(LC interface)
(Note)
N2OU08
(SC interface)
(Note)
N1EU04

3-7
Slot 36
Slot 35
Slot 34
Slot 33
Slot 32
Slot 31
Slot 30
Slot 29
Slot 26
Slot 25
Slot 24
Slot 23
Slot 22
Slot 21
Boards
Slot 20
Slots
Slot 19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot 36
Slot 35
Slot 34
Slot 33
Slot 32
Slot 31
Slot 30
Slot 29
Slot 26
Slot 25
Slot 24
Slot 23
Slot 22
Slot 21
Slot 20
Boards
Slot 19
Slots
3 Subrack
N1MU04
N1D34S
N1D75S
N1D12S
N1D12B
N1ETF8
N1EFF8
N1ETS8
N1TSB8
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EU08, N1OU08, and N2OU08 board when the cross-connect
capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
3. Other Boards
Table 3-5 associates cross-connect boards, SCC boards, and auxiliary interface
boards to the corresponding slots.
N1GXCS,
N2GXCS
N1EXCS
(Note 1)
N1UXCSA(
Note 1)
N1UXCSB(
Note 1)
9
9
N1XCE
(Note 2)
N1SCC
N1GSCC,
N2GSCC

3-8
Slot
101slot 102
Slot
59slot 60
Slot
38slot 40
Slot 37
Slot
27slot 28
Boards
Slot
17slot 18
Slots
Slot 9slot
10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot
101slot 102
Slot
59slot 60
Slot
38slot 40
Slot 37
Slot
27slot 28
Slot
17slot 18
Boards
Slot 9slot
10
Slots
3 Subrack
N1PIU
N1AUX
N1FAN
(Note 3)
61COA,
62COA
(Note 3)
Note 1: The OptiX OSN 3500 does not support the N1EXCS, N1UXCSA, N1UXCSB, and N1XCE
board when the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s.
Note 2: The N1XCE can only seat in the extended subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500. Logical slots
for the N1XCE are slot 59 and slot 60.
Note 3: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots, not physical
slots.

Table 3-6 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 3500.
Dimensions
722 mm (H) x 497 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight
23 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and

fans)

OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
3.2.1 Structure
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into
processing board area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and
fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-1.

3-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
1
2
3
4
5
1. Auxiliary interface area

4. Fan area
2. Interface board area

5. PIU area
3. Processing board area
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock

interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Processing board area: housing the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Interface board area: housing the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 2500
Fan area: housing two fan modules, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for the OptiX OSN 2500

3-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S
L
O
T
14
Interface board
S
L
O
T
13
SAP
S
L
O
T
12
Processing board
S
L
O
T
11
Processing board
CXL16/4/1
CXL16/4/1
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Processing board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Processing board
The subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500 has eight slots for interface boards and ten slots
for processing boards. Figure 3-4 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-5 shows the
access capacity for the subrack.
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
C
X
L
16
S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
1.25 Gbit/s
C
X
L
16
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
S S
S S S
S
L L
L L L
L
O O
O O O
O
T T
T T T
T
9 10
6 7 8
11
622 Mbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
S S S O
L L L T
O O O 5
T T T
2 3 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Figure 3-4 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
S
L
S S S
O
L L L
T
O O O
14
T T T
1 1 1
S
5 6 7
A
P
S
L
O
T
1
8
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
Figure 3-5 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack supports slot segmentation. Slots 5, 6, and 7 can be
segmented into two half-height slots respectively. After segmentation, the slot
distribution is shown in Figure 3-6, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-7.

3-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Interface board
S
L
O
T
12
Interface board
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
S
L
O
T
11
Interface board
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
8 9 10
Interface board
S
L
O
T
21
CXL16/4/1
S
L
O
T
20
CXL16/4/1
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
Interface board
S S S S S
L L L L L
O O O O O
T T T T T
1 2 3 4 19
SAP
3 Subrack
7
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
C
X
L
16
S
L
O
T
13
1.25 Gbit/s
C
X
L
16
S
L
O
T
12
2.5 Gbit/s
S S
S
S
L L
L
L
O O
O
O
T T
T
T
9 10
8
11
2.5 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
S
L
O
T
7
1.25 Gbit/s
622 Mbit/s
S
L
O
T S S
4 L L
O O
T T
5 6
622 Mbit/s
S
L
O
T
3
S S
L L
O O
T T
20 21
622 Mbit/s
S
L
O
T
2
622 Mbit/s
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
19
2.5 Gbit/s
Figure 3-6 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
S
L
S S S
O
L L L
T
O O O
14
T T T
1 1 1
S
5 6 7
A
P
S
L
O
T
1
8
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
Figure 3-7 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 2500 (after slot segmentation)
Service interface boards: slots 14, slots 1518

3-12
PIU
(Slot 23)
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Service processing boards: slots 58 and slots 1113 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slots 58, slots 1113, and slots 1921 (after slot
segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 910
SAP boards: slot 14
SEI auxiliary interface boards: auxiliary interface area
Fan units: slot 24 and slot 25
Table 3-7 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot for
processing boards
Slots for
corresponding
interface boards
Slot for processing

boards
Slots for corresponding

interface boards
Slot 6
Slots 1, 2
Slot 7
Slots 3, 4
Slot 12
Slots 15, 16
Slot 13
Slots 17, 18
Slot 6 (Note)
Slots 2
Slot 20 (Note)
Slots 1
Slot 7 (Note)
Slots 4
Slot 21 (Note)
Slots 3
Note: The slot is half-height slot after slot segmentation.

Table 3-8 associates processing boards to the corresponding slots.

Table 3-8 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500
Slots and
capacity
After slot
segmentation
Slot 8
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
N1SF16,
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4
N1/N2SLD4
Boards

3-13
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 5Slot
6 , Slot
19Slot 20
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 7, Slot
21 (1.25
Gbit/s )
Slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
Before slot segmentation
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Slots and
capacity
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 5Slot
6 , Slot
19Slot 20
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 7, Slot
21 (1.25
Gbit/s )
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot
segmentation
R1SLD4
9
R1PD1
R1EFT4
R1SL4,
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SEP (work
with interface
boards) (Note 2)
N1SEP1 (led out
from front panel)
(Note 2)
N1/N2SPQ4,
N1PD3, N1PL3
N1PL3A
N1PQ1, N1PQM
N1EFS4
N1/N2EFS0
N2EGS2,
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N2EMR0 (work
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (work
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (led out
from front panel)

3-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Slots and
capacity
After slot
segmentation
Slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 5Slot
6 , Slot
19Slot 20
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 7, Slot
21 (1.25
Gbit/s )
N2EMR0 (led
out from front
panel)
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
Boards
Slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4 (Note 3)
N1MR2A
9
9
N1MR2B
N1MR2C (Note
4)
N1LWX
N1DCU, N1BA2,
N1BPA
Note 1: The SLT1 provides 14 optical interfaces when in slots 14. The SLT1 provides 112 optical interfaces
when in slots 7slot 8 or slot 11slot 12. The SLT1 provides 18 optical interfaces when in slot 13.
2. Interface Boards

3-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
N1EU08
N1EU08A
N1OU08
(LC type)
N2OU08
(SC type)
Slot 18
Slot 17
Slot 16
Slot 15
Slot 4
Boards
Slot 3
Slot 1
Slots
Slot 2
9
9
N1EU04
N1MU04
N1C34S
N1D34S
N1D75S
N1D12S
N1D12B
N1ETF8
N1EFF8
N1ETS8
N1TSB8
3. Other Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16,
Q2CXL1/4/16/1
6A (physical
board) (Note 1)

3-16
Slot 101slot 102
SEI area
Slot 50
Slot 24slot 25
Boards
Slot 14
Slot 9slot 10
Slots
Slot 22slot 23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

SCC,GSCC
(logical board)
slot 82slot
83
CXL, ECXL
(logical board)
slot 80slot
81
Q1SL1/4/16/16
A (logical board)
Q1SAP
Slot 101slot 102
SEI area
Slot 50
Slot 24slot 25
Boards
Slot 14
Slot 9slot 10
Slots
Slot 22slot 23
3 Subrack
9
9
Q1PIU
Q1SEI
9
N1FAN (Note 2)
61COA, 62COA
(Note 2)
9
CAU (Note 2)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 2500.
It seats in slot 9 and slot 10. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL, SCC and
SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 910.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-11 lists the technical parameters of the subrack of the OptiX OSN 2500.
Dimensions
472 mm (H) x 447 mm (W) x 295 mm (D)
Weight
17 kg (net weight of the subrack, not including spare boards and

fans)

3-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
3.3 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG

The OptiX OSN 2500 REG is used to regenerate STM-16 and STM-64 signals.
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG uses the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. The subrack structure
and slot assignment are the same as those of the OptiX OSN 2500. This section
mainly describes the basic configuration of the REG.
Table 3-12 associates OptiX OSN 2500 REG boards to the corresponding slots.
N1SL16
N1SL16A
N1SF16
Q1CRG
SEI area
Slot 24slot 25
Boards
Slot 22 slot 23
Slot 14
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 8
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 7
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 6
622 Mbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
Slot 5
(622 Mbit/s )
Table 3-12 The relation between boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 2500 REG
9
9
Q1SAP
Q1PIU
N1FAN
Q1SEI
N1BA2
N1BPA
N1DCU
The OptiX OSN 2500 REG can also be configured with N1BPA, N1BA2, N1DCU and
external equipment like UPM and COA as required. For their specific slots, see Table
3-10.

3-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
3.4 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500A

OptiX OSN 1500A subrack.
3.4.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500A adopts one-layer structure. It is divided into board area, fan
area, PIU area and fiber routing area, as shown in Figure 3-8.
2
3
4
6
5
1. Fan area
4. Board area
2. Board area
3. PIU area
6. Mounting ear
Figure 3-8 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Board area: for holding the boards of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Fan area: housing one fan box, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing two PIU boards, providing power for the OptiX OSN 1500A

The OptiX OSN 1500A has 11 slots before slot segmentation. Figure 3-9 shows the
slot distribution.
Slot 1
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 6
Slot 11
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-9 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (before slot segmentation)

3-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
The OptiX OSN 1500A supports slot segmentation. Slots 12 and 13 can be
distribution is shown in Figure 3-10.
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-10 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500A (after slot segmentation)
Figure 3-11 shows the access capacity for the OptiX OSN 1500A.
Slot
XCS
A 1
Slot20
Slot 11
XCS B 1.25 Gbit/s

Slot 6
Slot 2/12
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 7 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 3/13
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 8 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
Figure 3-11 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The access capacity for slot 12 or slot 13 is 2.5 Gbit/s before slot segmentation. After
slot segmentation, the access capacity for half-height slot 2, slot 3, slot 12 or slot 13 is
1.25 Gbit/s.
Service processing boards: slots 69 and slots 1213 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing boards: slot 69, slot 1213, slot 23 (after slot segmentation)
CXL boards: slots 45
EOW boards: slot 9
Fan units: slot 20


3-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Table 3-13 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
N1SEP1 (led out

from front panel)
R1SLD4,
R1SL4,
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
9
9
9
9
N1EFS4
R1EFT4
N1PL3A
R1L75S,
R1L12S
R1PD1A,
R1PD1B
R1PL1A,
R1PL1B
Slot 12
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 3
(1.25 Gbit/s )
N1SF16,
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4,
N1/N2SLD4,
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 2
(1.25 Gbit/s)
After slot segmentation

Slot 12slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 7
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 6
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slots and
capacity
N2EGS2,
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (led out

from front panel)
N1/N2EMR0
(led out from
front panel)
N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4
N1MR2A

3-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
N1LWX
N1DCU, N1BA2,
N1BPA
Slot 12
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 3
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 2
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slot 9
(1.25 Gbit/s)

Slot 12slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 8
(1.25 Gbit/s)
N1MR2B
Slot 7
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Boards
Slot 6
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Slots and
capacity
Note: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500A provides 112 optical interfaces.
2. Other Boards
Table 3-14 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500A
Q1CXL1/4/16,
Q2CXL1/4/16/16
A (physical
board) (Note 1)
SCC, GSCC
(logical board)
Slots 82, 83
CXL, ECXL
(logical board)
Slots 80,
81
Q1SL1/4/16/16A
L (logical board)
R1EOW
Slot 101slot 102
Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 1, slot 11
Slots
Slot 9
Slot 4slot 5
Boards
9
9
R1AUX, R2AUX
R1PIUA
R1FAN (Note 1)
61COA, 62COA
(Note 1)

3-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 1, slot 11
Slots
Slot 4slot 5
Boards
Slot 101slot 102
3 Subrack
CAU (Note 1)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500.
It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL,
SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 45.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, 62COA , and CAU are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-15 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A equipment.
Table 3-15 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500A
Dimensions
131mm mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 262 mm (D)
Weight
8 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)

3-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
3.5 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 1500B

OptiX OSN 1500B subrack.
3.5.1 Structure
The OptiX OSN 1500B adopts two-layer structure. It is divided into processing board
area, interface board area, auxiliary interface area, fan area, and PIU area, as shown
in Figure 3-12.
7
6
1. Interface board area

4. Processing board area
7. Mounting ear
2. PIU area
5. Auxiliary interface area
3. Fan area
Figure 3-12 Structure of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Processing board area: for holding the processing boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Interface board area: for holding the interface boards of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Auxiliary interface area: including alarm interfaces, orderwire interface, clock

interfaces, operation and maintenance interfaces, F1 port, serial ports and so on
Fan area: housing one fan module, enabling heat dissipation function
PIU area: housing PIU modules, providing power for equipment
ESD area: located above the fan box.

3-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack

The OptiX OSN 1500B has four slots for interface boards on upper layer and ten slots
(including slot 4 and slot 5) for processing boards before slot segmentation. Figure
3-13 shows the slot distribution. Figure 3-14 shows the access capacity for the OptiX
OSN 1500B.
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-13 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 11
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 6
622 Mbit/s
Slot 12
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 7
622 Mbit/s
Slot 13
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 8
622 Mbit/s
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9
622 Mbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-14 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (before slot segmentation)
The OptiX OSN 1500B supports slot segmentation. Slots 11, 12, and13 can be
distribution is shown in Figure 3-15, and the access capacity is shown in Figure 3-16.

3-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-15 Slot distribution of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
Slot 14
Slot 15
Slot 16
Slot 17
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 11 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 6
622 Mbit/s
Slot 20 Slot 2
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 12 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 7
622 Mbit/s
Slot 3
1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 13 1.25 Gbit/s
Slot 8
622 Mbit/s
FAN
Slot 4
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 9
622 Mbit/s
Slot 5
2.5 Gbit/s
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 3-16 Access capacity of the OptiX OSN 1500B (after slot segmentation)
Service interface boards: slots 1417
Service processing board: slots 49 and slots 1113 (before slot segmentation)
Service processing board: slots 19 and slots 1113 (after slot segmentation)
CXL board: slots 45
Orderwire boards: slot 9 (also for the processing boards)
Fan units: slot 20
Power interface boards: slots 18 and 19

3-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Table 3-16 Slot mapping table for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot for processing boards
Slot for corresponding interface boards
Slot 2
Slot 14
Slot 3
Slot 16
Slot 7
Slot 15
Slot 8
Slot 17
Slot 12
Slots 14, 15
Slot 13
Slots 16, 17
Note: The interface boards of the PD3, PL3, SEP, and SPQ4 boards can only be
inserted in corresponding slots in even number. Slot 12 and slot 7 share slot 15 for interface boards.
Slot 13 and slot 8 share slot 17 for interface boards.


Table 3-17 The relation between processing boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s )
R1SLD4
R1SL4,
R1SLQ1, R1SL1
N1SEP (work
with interface
boards) (Note 2)
9
N1SEP1 (led out

from front panel)
(Note 2)

3-27
Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
N1SF16,
N1/N2SL16(A),
N1/N2SLQ4,
N1/N2SLD4,
N1/N2SL4,
N1/N2SLQ1,
N1/N2SL1,
N1SLT1 (Note 1)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot
segmentation
Slot 1slot 3
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
N1PL3A
N1PQ1, N1PQM
R1PD1
R1PL1A,
R1PL1B
R1EFT4
9
9
N1EFS4
N1/N2EFS0
N2EGS2,
N1EGT2,
N2EGR2
N1EFT8 (work
with interface
boards)
N1EFT8 (led out

from front panel)
N2EMR0 (work
with interface
boards)
N2EMR0 (led
out from front
panel)
N1ADL4,
N1ADQ1
N1IDQ1,
N1IDL4 (Note 3)
N1MR2A
N1MR2B
N1MR2C (Note
4)

3-28
Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s )
N1/N2SPQ4,
N1PD3, N1PL3
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 9
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
Boards
After slot
segmentation
Slot 1slot 3
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
Slot 11
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 12
(2.5 Gbit/s)
Slot 13
(2.5 Gbit/s )
Slot 9
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 8
(622 Mbit/s)
Slot 7
(622 Mbit/s )
Slot 6
(622 Mbit/s )
N1LWX
N1DCU, N1BA2,
N1BPA
Boards
Slot 11,slot 13
(1.25 Gbit/s )
After slot
segmentation
Slot 1slot 3
(1.25 Gbit/s )
Slots and
capacity
Note 1: The SLT1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B provides 112 optical interfaces.
Note 4: The N1MR2C seats in any of slots 1417.
2. Interface Boards
Slot 17
Boards
Slot 16
Slot 14
Slots
Slot 15
Table 3-18 The relation between interface boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
N1EU08
N1OU08 (LC
type)
N2OU08 (SC
type)
N1EU04
N1MU04
N1D34S
N1D75S
N1D12S
N1D12B
N1ETF8
N1EFF8
N1ETS8
N1TSB8

3-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3 Subrack
3. Other Boards
Q1CXL1/4/16,
Q2CXL1/4/16/1
6A (physical
board) (Note 1)
SCC, GSCC
(logical board)
Slot
82, 83
CXL, ECXL
(Logical board)
Slot
80, 81
Q1SL1/4/16/16
AL (logical
board)
R1EOW
Slot 101slot
102
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 18, slot 19
Boards
Slot 9
Slot 4slot 5
Slots
Slot 50
Table 3-19 The relation between other boards and slots for the OptiX OSN 1500B
9
9
R1AUX, R2AUX
R1PIU
R1FAN (Note 2)
61COA, 62COA
(Note 2)

3-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Slot 50
Slot 20
Slot 10
Slot 9
Slot 101slot
102
Boards
Slot 4slot 5
Slots
Slot 18, slot 19
3 Subrack
CAU (Note 2)
Note 1: The CXL is a line, system control, cross-connect and timing board of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
It seats in slot 4 and slot 5. On the T2000, it is displayed as three board types: CXL,
SCC and SL1/4/16, respectively occupying the logic slots 8081, 8283 and 45.
Note 2: The corresponding slots for the N1FAN, 61COA, and 62COA are logical slots,
not physical slots.

Table 3-20 lists the technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 3-20 Technical parameters of the OptiX OSN 1500B
Dimensions
221 mm (H) x 444 mm (W) x 263 mm (D)
Weight
9 kg (including backboard, 2 pieces PIU and fan)

3-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board Classification and List
This chapter introduces the classification and appearance of the boards of the OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.
4.1 Board Classification

Most boards of the OptiX OSN products are interchangeable. The same boards can
be used either in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 or in the OptiX OSN 1500
equipment. This section classifies the boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 by function.
Boards are classified into the following types.
SDH boards
PDH boards
Data processing boards
Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Other boards
4.1.1 SDH Boards

Table 4-1 lists the SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.

4-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 4-1 SDH boards
Product
Description
3500
(40 Gbit/s)
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
N2SL64
STM-64
processing board
N1SL16(A)
STM-16
processing board
N2SL16(A)
STM-16
processing board
N1SF16
STM-16
processing board
with FEC
N1SLQ4
4 x STM-4
processing board
N2SLQ4
4 x STM-4
processing board
N1SLD4
2 x STM-4
processing board
N2SLD4
2 x STM-4
processing board
N1SL4
1 x STM-4
processing board
N2SL4
1 x STM-4
processing board
N1SLT1
12 x STM-1
processing board
N1SLQ1
4 x STM-1
processing board
N2SLQ1
4 x STM-1
processing board
N1SL1
1 x STM-1
processing board
N2SL1
1 x STM-1
processing board
R1SLD4
2 x STM-4
processing board
(half-height slot)
R1SL4
1 x STM-4
processing board
(half-height slot)
Board

4-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Product
Description
3500
(40 Gbit/s)
Board
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
R1SLQ1
4x STM-1
processing board
(half-height slot)
R1SL1
1x STM-1
processing board
(half-height slot)
N1SEP1
STM-1 processing
board(led out from
front panel)
N1SEP
STM-1 processing
board(work with
interface boards)
N1EU08
8 x STM-1
interface board (e)
N1EU08A
8 x STM-1
interface board (e)
N1EU04
4 x STM-1
interface board (e)
N1OU08
8 x STM-1
interface board (o)
N2OU08
8 x STM-1
interface board (o)
N1TSB8
8-channel
switching &
bridging board
4.1.2 PDH Boards

Table 4-2 lists the PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-2 PDH boards
Board
Product
3500
(40 Gbit/s)
Description
N1PQ1
63 x E1 processing
board
R1PD1 A/B
32 x E1 processing
board(75 /120 )
R1PL1 A/B
16 x E1 processing
board (75 /120
)
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500

4-3
1500A
1500B
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board
Product

3500
(40 Gbit/s)
Description
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
R1L75S
16 x 75 E1/T1
switching interface
board
R1L12S
16 x 120 E1/T1
switching interface
board
N1PQM
63 x T1/E1
processing board
N1PD3
6 x E3/DS3
processing board
N1PL3
3 x E3/DS3
processing board
N1PL3A
3 x E3/DS3
processing board
N1SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1
processing board
N2SPQ4
4 x E4/STM-1
processing board
N1D75S
32 x 75 E1/T1
switching interface
board
N1D12S
32 x 120 E1/T1
switching interface
board
N1D12B
32 x 120 E1/T1
interface board
N1D34S
6 x E3/DS3 PDH
interface board
N1C34S
3 x E3/DS3 PDH
interface board
N1MU04
4 x E4/STM-1
interface board
N1TSB8
8-channel
switching &
bridging board
4.1.3 Data Processing Boards

Table 4-3 lists the data processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN products,
including ATM boards and Ethernet boards.
4-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 4-3 Data processing boards
Board
Product
Description
3500
(40 Gbit/s)
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
N1EFS4
4-port FE
processing board
with L2 switching
N1EFS0
FE processing
board with L2
switching
N2EFS0
FE processing
board with L2
switching
N1EGS2
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
switching
processing board
N2EGS2
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
switching
processing board
N1EGT2
2-port Gigabit
Ethernet
transparent
transmission
board
N1EFT8
16-port Fast
Ethernet
transparent
transmission
board
R1EFT4
4-port Fast
Ethernet
transparent
transmission
board
N1EGS4
4 GE Ethernet
transparent
transmission and
convergence
board
N1EMR0
12 FE 1 GE
Ethernet
processing board
with RPR
function
N2EMR0
12 FE 1 GE
Ethernet

4-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board
Product
Description
3500
(40 Gbit/s)
3500
(80 Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
processing board
with RPR
function
N1EGR2
2-port GE
processing board
with RPR
function
N2EGR2
2-port GE
processing board
with RPR
function
N1EFF8
8-port 10/100M
Ethernet optical
interface board
N1ETF8
8-port 10/100M
BaseT fast
Ethernet
interface board
N1ETS8
8-port 10/100M
BaseT Ethernet
interface
switching board
N1ADL4
1 x STM-4 ATM
service
processing board
N1ADQ1
4 x STM-1ATM
service
processing board
N1IDL4
1 x STM-4 ATM
service
processing board
with IMA (Note 1)
N1IDQ1
4 x STM-1 ATM
service
processing board
with IMA (Note 1)
N1MST4
4 x multi-service
transparent
transmission
processing board
Note 1: IMA is a kind of function named inverse multiplexing ATM.
4.1.4 Cross-Connect and SCC Boards

4-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 4-4 lists the cross-connect and SCC boards supported by the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 4-4 Cross-Connect and SCC boards
Board
Product
Description
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
N1GXCSA
Cross-connect and
timing board (40
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
N2GXCSA
Cross-connect and
timing board (40
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
N1EXCSA
Enhanced
cross-connect and
timing board
(80Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
N1UXCSA
Super
cross-connect and
timing board (80
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
N1UXCSB
Super
cross-connect and
timing board (80
higher order, 20
Gbit/s lower order,
supporting
extended subrack)
N1XCE
Lower order
cross-connect and
timing board for
extended subrack
(1.25 Gbit/s)
Q1CXL1
STM-1 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
2500REG
2500

4-7
1500A
1500B
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board
Product
Description
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
Q1CXL4
STM-4 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
Q1CXL16
STM-16 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 5 Gbit/s
lower order)
Q2CXL1
STM-1 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
Q2CXL4
STM-4 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
Q2CXL16
STM-16 line,
system control,
cross-connect and
timing board (20
Gbit/s higher
order, 20 Gbit/s
lower order)
N1SCC
System control
and
communication
board
N1GSCC
System control
and
communication
board (supporting
intelligent
features)

4-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board
Product
Description
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
N2GSCC
System control
and
communication
board (supporting
intelligent
features)
Q1CRG
System control,
communication
and timing board
for OptiX OSN
2500 REG
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
4.1.5 Other Boards

Table 4-5 lists the other boards supported by the OptiX OSN products.
Table 4-5 Other boards
Product
Board
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
Description
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
1500A
1500B
N1MR2A
2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
N1MR2B
2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
(half-height slot)
N1MR2C
2-channel optical
add/drop
multiplexing board
(interface area)
N1LWX
Arbitrary bit rate

wavelength
conversion board
N1BPA
Booster amplifier
and pre-amplifier
board
N1BA2
Booster amplifier
board
N1DCU
Dispersion
compensate board
N1PIU
Power interface
board

4-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Product
Board

3500 (40
Gbit/s)
Description
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
2500REG
2500
Q1PIU
Power interface
board
R1PIU
Power interface
board
R2PIU
Power interface
board
N1FAN
Fan board
R1FAN
Fan board
N1FANA
Fan board (large

power)
R1EOW
Orderwire board
Q1SEI
Extended signal
interface board
Q1SAP
System auxiliary
processing board
N1AUX
System auxiliary
interface board
R1AUX
1500A
1500B
System auxiliary
interface board
R2AUX
System auxiliary
interface board
61COA/62CO
A
External
case-shape optical
amplifier
TDA
External tone &

data access board
UPM
External
uninterruptible
power modules
4.2 Board Appearance

Figure 4-1 shows the board appearance of the OptiX OSN products.

4-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1. Optical interface
2. Ejector lever
3. Printed circuit board
Figure 4-1 Board appearance
Caution:
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD
wrist strap is well grounded, thus to prevent the static from damaging the board.
Warning:
It is strictly forbidden to stare into the optical interface board and the optical interface,
lest the laser beam inside the optical fiber would hurt your eyes.

4-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
SDH Boards
This chapter introduces the SDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Parameter configuration
Protection configuration
Version description
Technical parameters
The SDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-1.
5.1 SL64
The SL64 is the 1 x STM-64 processing board.
Table 5-1 lists the slots for the SL64 board.
Table 5-1 Slots for the SL64
Product
SL64
OptiX OSN 3500 (80 Gbit/s)
Slots 78, 1112
Slots 8, 11
OptiX OSN 2500
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Not available
5.1.1 Functionality
5-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL64
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-64 optical signal.
Optical
interface
specifications
Support the I-64.2, S-64.2b, L-64.2b, Le-64.2, Ls-64.2 and V-64.2b (used with BA, PA, and
DCU) optical module, which complies with ITU-T Recommendation G.691.
Optical module
specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical modules.
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed wavelength output, which can access DWDM
equipment directly.
Laser can be open and close at optical interfaces.

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Service
processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the concatenated services at levels from VC-4-4c
to STM-64-4c.
Overhead
processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-64 signals.

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission and termination).
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events.
K byte
processing
Be able to process multiple sets of K bytes. One SL64 board can support up to four
multiplex section protection (MSP) rings.
REG
specifications
Support setting and querying REG working mode.
Protection
schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber MSP, linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection
(SNCP).
Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP
rings.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces.

Support inloop and outloop at VC-4 level, locating fault fast.
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to services.
Support the query of board information.
Support the in-service uploading of FPGA.
Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.1.2 Principle
Figure 5-1 shows the principle block diagram of the SL64.

5-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
O/E conversion module
O/E
conversion
STM-64
E/O
conversion
STM-64
Backplane
SDH
overhead
processing
module
MUX/
DEMUX
Logic control
module
+5 V
+3.3 V
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Power
module
+3.3 V (standby)
+3.3 V
Figure 5-1 The principle block diagram of the SL64
1. In Receive Direction
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part.
The O/E conversion converts the received 10.71 Gbit/s optical signals into electrical
signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into multiple
parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same time. This
module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms.
The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the SDH
overhead processing module. The SDH overhead processing module extracts or
inserts overhead byte from/to the received multiple low rate electrical signals,
performs pointer processing, and then sends the signals to the cross-connect unit
through backplane bus. R_LOF and R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.
2. In Transmit Direction
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the
parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the O/E
conversion module.
The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical
signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into
OTN optical signals at 10.71 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
Logic control module
This unit:
Generates timing clock and frame header information required by the SL64.
implements ALS function.
realizes the pass-through of orderwire and ECC bytes between the two optical
processing boards constituting the ADM when the SCC is not online.
control the switching from active cross-connect board to standby one when the
5-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
active one is faulty.
Power module
Provide the board with required DC voltages.
5.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-2 shows the front panels of the SL64.
SL64
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
IN
SL64
Figure 5-2 The front panel of the SL64
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL64 board.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colors (red, green)
Service active status indicator (ACT) green
Board software status indicator (PROG) double colors (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) three colors (red, green, yellow)
For detailed description of the indicators, see Appendix A.

2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair)

Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces incline down.
5-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

The major parameters required by the SL64 are as follows.
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. Successive transmission of the higher order access point
identifier through J1 at the transmit end helps the receive end learn that its connection
with the specified transmit end is in continuous connection status. When J1 mismatch
is detected at the receive end, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM
alarm. Value of the J1 is Huawei SBS by default.
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received.
Once mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM
alarm and insert all 1s into the C4 in downstream stations.
Table 5-2 associates the C2 setting to the service type.
Table 5-2 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL64
Service type
Parameter setting of C2
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34/45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The versions of the SL64 is N2. The SL64 N2 supports tandem connection monitoring
(TCM) function.

Table 5-3 list the technical parameters of the SL64. Table 5-4 lists the supported
optical interface parameters with fixed wavelength output, complying with ITU-T
Recommendation G.692.
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
9.95 Gbit/s
Processing capability
1 x STM-64 standard service or concatenated service
Line code pattern
Non return to zero (NRZ)
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)
1.12

5-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
Power consumption (W)
30
Type of optical interfaces
I-64.2
S-64.2
b
L-64.2
b
Le-64.
2
Ls-64.
2
V-64.2b
(BA+PA+
DCU)
(Note)
Wavelength (nm)
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550
1550.12
Transmission distance (km)
0 to
20
2 to 40
30 to
70
30 to
70
80
70 to 120
Launched power (dBm)
5 to
1
1 to 2
10 to
14
1 to 4
3 to 5
12 to 15
Receiver sensitivity (dBm)
14
14
14
19.5
21
23
Receiver overload (dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
Maximum dispersion
tolerance (ps/nm)
500
800
1600
1200
1600
800
Long-term operating
condition
Temperature: 0C to 45C
Short-term operating
condition
Environment for storage
Humidity: 10% to 90%
Humidity: 5% to 95%

Environment for
transportation

Note: The bracketed part indicates that V-64.2b optical interface specification consists of booster
amplifier (BA), preamplifier (PA) , and the dispersion compensation unit (DCU).
Table 5-4 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with ITU-T G.692
Bit rate
9.95 Gbit/s
Classification code
1 x 29 dB
Dispersion limit (km)
40
Mean launched power (dBm)
4 to 1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm)
17
Min. overload point (dBm)
Maximum path allowable dispersion (ps/nm)
800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2

5-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.2 SF16/SL16
The SL16 is an STM-16 processing board. The SF16 is an STM-16 processing board
with FEC function. The two boards are responsible for STM-16 optical signal
processing.
Table 5-5 lists the slots for the SL16 andSF16.
Table 5-5 Slots for the SL16 and SF16
Product
SL16
SF16
Slots 58, 1114
Slots 58, 1114
Slots 68, 1113
Slots 68, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 78, 1112
Slots 78, 1112
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
5.2.1 Functionality
Functionality
SL16
SF16
Basic function
Receive/Transmit one STM-16 optical signal
Receive/Transmit one OTU1 (2.66 Gbit/s,

FEC) optical signal.
Support enabling or disabling FEC function.
Optical
interface
specifications
Support the I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1, L-16.2,

L-16.2Je, V-16.2Je (used with BA), and
U-16.2Je (used with BA and PA) optical
interface, which complies with ITU-T
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed
wavelength output, which can access
DWDM equipment directly.
Optical
module
specifications
Service
processing
Support the Ue-16.2c, Ue-16.2d, and

Ue-16.2e optical interface.
Support long distance transmission, up to
200 km.
Support the ITU-T G.692-compliant fixed
wavelength output, which can access
DWDM equipment directly.
Support detecting and query of the

information on optical modules.
Support detecting and query of the

information on optical modules.
Laser can be open and close at optical

interfaces.
Laser can be open and close at optical

interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be

enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be

enabled or disabled at optical interfaces.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the

concatenated services at levels from
VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the

concatenated services at levels from
VC-4-4C to STM-16-4C.
The SF16 process overheads and the
encapsulation code of FEC in a way
complying with ITU-T Recommendation
G.709.

5-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL16
SF16
Overhead
processing
Support the processing of the section

overheads of STM-16 signals.
Support the overhead processing,

performance monitoring, and alarm
detecting of the OTU, ODU, and OPU,
complying with ITU-T Recommendation
G.709.
Support the processing of the path

overheads (transparent transmission and
termination).

overheads (transparent transmission and
termination).
Alarms and
performance
events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events.

The SF16 provides the alarms and performance events related to OUT, ODU, OPU, and
FEC.
K byte
processing
Be able to process multiple sets of K byte. One SL16/SF16 board can support up to two
MSP rings.
REG
specifications
Support setting and querying REG working mode.
Protection
schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP), linear MSP and
subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Support shared optical path protection of MSP ring and SNCP ring, or that of two MSP rings.
Maintenance

Support smooth upgrade of board software.
5.2.2 Principle
Figure 5-3 shows the principle block diagram of the SF16. The block diagram of the
SL16 is the same as that of the SF16 after removing the part surrounded by broken
line.

5-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
O/E conv ersion module
STM-16
STM-16
Backplane
O/E
conv ersion
E/O
conv ersion
Digital packet
encapsulation
and FEC
processing
module
MUX/
DEMUX
SDH
ov erhead
processing
module
Logic control
module
+5 V
+3.3 V
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC unit
Power
module
+3.3 V (standby )
+3.3 V
Figure 5-3 The principle block diagram of the SF16
The O/E conversion module includes E/O (O/E) conversion and MUX/DEMUX part.
The O/E conversion converts the received 2.66 Gbit/s FEC optical signals into
electrical signals. The DEMUX part demultiplexes the high rate electrical signals into
multiple parallel low rate electrical signals, and clock signal is recovered at the same
time. This module also responsible for detecting R_LOS alarms.
The multiple low rate electrical signals demultiplexed are transferred to the digital
packet encapsulation and FEC processing module to have FEC packets
encapsulated/decapsulated and OTN overheads processed. There are connections
with clock and data signals between the digital packet encapsulation and FEC
processing module, the O/E conversion module, and the SDH overhead processing
module. Alarms related to FEC overhead processing are detected in this module.
The SDH overhead processing module extracts or inserts overhead byte from/to the
received multiple low rate electrical signals, performs pointer processing, and then
sends the signals to the cross-connect unit through backplane bus. R_LOF and
R_OOF alarms are detected in this module.
After being inserted with overhead bytes in the SDH overhead processing module, the
parallel low rate electrical signals from the cross-connect unit are then sent to the
digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module.
The digital packet encapsulation and FEC processing module performs FEC coding
and OTN overhead inserting to the multiple low rate signals, and then sends it to the
O/E conversion module.
The O/E conversion module multiplexes the received parallel low rate electrical
signals into high rate electrical signals through the MUX part, converts the signals into
OTN optical signals with FEC at 2.66 Gbit/s. Signals are then sent to fibers for
transmission.

5-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
generates timing clock and frame header information required by the
SF16/SL16.
processing boards constituting the ADM.
Power module
5.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-4 shows the front panels of the SL16 and the SF16.
SL16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
SF16
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
SL16
SF16
Figure 5-4 The front panel of the SL16 and the SF16
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL16/SF16.

5-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

2. Interfaces
Quantity: single optical interface (one pair)

Type: LC connector
The optical interfaces of the SF16 are not swappable. The SL16 can use swappable
optical modules for easy maintenance.

The major parameters required by the SL16/SF16 are as follows.
J1
C2
alarm and insert all 1s into the C4.
Table 5-6 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SF16/SL16
Service type
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The version of the SF16 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and OptiX
OSN 1500. The board can be set to be under ADM mode or REG mode.
The versions of the SL16 are N1 and N2. The two versions realize board functions in
the same way. The N2SL16 supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM) function,
which is not available in version N1. The two versions can be replaced with each other
directly. The direct replacement command must be delivered in NM after hardware
5-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
replacing is fulfilled.
Note:
If the TCM function is enabled on version N2, the command of replacing the version
N2 with version N1 will fail.
The board named SL16A is not hot swappable for optical module, because the optical
interfaces are equipped with fixed optical modules.

Table 5-7 and Table 5-8 list the technical parameters of the SL16 and the SF16
respectively. Table 5-9 lists the supported optical interface parameters with fixed
wavelength output, complying with ITU-T Recommendation G.692.
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
2.488 Gbit/s
Processing
capability
Line code pattern
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.10
Power consumption
(W)
20
Type of optical
modules
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
L-16.2
Je
V-16.2
Je (BA)
U-16.2Je
(BA+PA)
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
1550
1550.12
Transmission
distance (km)
02
215
1540
4080
801
00
8014
0
14017
0
Launched power
(dBm)
10 to
3
5 to 0
2 to 3
2 to 3
5 to 7
14
14
Receiver sensitivity
(dBm)
18
18
27
28
28
28
33
Receiver overload
(dBm)
10
Minimum extinction
ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2
8.2

5-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 5% to 95%
Table 5-8 Technical parameters of the SF16
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
2.66 Gbit/s
Line code pattern
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.09
26
Specification of optical
interfaces (Note 1)
Ue-16.2c
Ue-16.2d
Ue-16.2e
FEC+BA(14)+P
A
FEC+BA(17)+PA
FEC+BA(17)+R
A+PA
Wavelength (nm)
G.692-compliant
wavelength with
100 GHz interval
G.692-compliant
wavelength with
100 GHz interval
G.692-compliant
wavelength with
100 GHz interval
Transmission distance (km)
178
189
200
Launched power (dBm)

(Note 2)
2 to +3
2 to +3
2 to +3

(Note 2)
31 (APD)
31 (APD)
31 (APD)
Receiver overload (dBm)

(Note 2)
9 (APD)
9 (APD)
9 (APD)
Minimum extinction ratio

(dB) (Note 2)
10
10
10
Long-term operating
condition

5-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
condition
Humidity: 5% to 95%

Environment for
transportation

Note 1: The bracketed numbers indicate corresponding parameters. For example, BA(14) indicates the
optical power is 14 dBm after signals are amplified by BA. FEC+BA+PA indicates that the specifications of
optical interfaces consist of FEC, BA, and PA.
Note 2: Parameters listed in the above table are of the optical module only, but not of amplifiers.
Table 5-9 Parameters of the fixed wavelength interfaces complying with G.692
Bit rate
2488320 kbit/s
Classification code
8 x 22 dB
5 x 30 dB
3 x 33 dB
Dispersion limit (km)
170
170
640
Mean launched power (dBm)
2 to 3
5 to 7
5 to 1
Minimum sensitivity (dBm)
28
28
28
Min. overload point (dBm)
Maximum path allowable

dispersion (ps/nm)
3500
3500
12800
Minimum extinction ratio (dB)
8.2
8.2
8.2

5-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.3 SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
The SL4 is the 1 x STM-4 processing board. The SLD4 is the 2 x STM-4 processing
board. The SLQ4 is the 4 x STM-4 processing board.
The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-10 lists the slots for the SL4, SLD4, and SLQ4.
Table 5-10 Slots for the SLQ4, SLD4 and SL4
Product
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 58, 1114
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 68, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 78, 1113
Slots 78, 1112
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
5.3.1 Functionality
Functionality
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Basic function
Receive/Transmit
one STM-4 optical
signal.
Receive/Transmit
two STM-4 optical
signals.
Receive/Transmit
four STM-4 optical
signals.
Optical interface
specifications
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2, and Ve-4.2 optical interface,
which comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Optical module
specifications
Support the detecting and query of the information on optical

modules.
Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at
optical interfaces.
Support the use and monitoring of SFP swappable optical module.
Service processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and the VC-4-4C

concatenated services.

5-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Functionality
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
Overhead
processing

Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent
transmission and termination).
Alarms and
performance
events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify

maintenance and administration.
Protection
schemes
Support two-fiber and four-fiber multiplex section protection (MSP),

linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Support MSP or SNCP shared optical path protection.
Maintenance

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to
services.
Support smooth board software upgrade.
5.3.2 Principle
Figure 5-5 shows the principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4 (1 x STM-4
optical signal is processed).
Backplane
STM-4
STM-4
O/E
conversion
module
E/O
conversion
module
Cross-connect unit
Frame
synchronous
and scrambler
module
Overhead
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Logic
control
module
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
SCC
-48 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 V ( Standby )
Figure 5-5 The principle block diagram of the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4

5-16
+3.3 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-4 optical signal into STM-4
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-4 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module,
where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received STM-4
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-4
signal, and then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane bus.
Signals from the cross-connect unit are inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead
processing unit, and then sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module implements parallel/serial conversion
for the received STM-4 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion
module after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-4 electrical signal into STM-4
optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
SL4/SLD4/SLQ4.
Power module
5.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-6 shows the front panels of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.

5-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
SLD4
SL4
SLQ4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
OUT1
OUT1
IN1
IN1
IN
OUT2
OUT2
IN2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
SLD4
SL4
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
SLQ4
Figure 5-6 The front panel of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4.

2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL4, two pairs for the SLD4, and four
pairs for the SLQ4
Type: LC connector
The SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies
maintenance.

The major parameters required by the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are as follows.
J1
5-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
C2
alarm and insert all 1s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type.
Table 5-11 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SL4/SLD4/SLQ4
Service type
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The versions of the SL4, SLQ4, and SLD4 are N1 and N2. The boards can be used in
the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ4 supports tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two
versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command
must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
Note:

Table 5-12 lists the technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4.
Table 5-12 Technical parameters of the SL4, SLD4 and SLQ4
Parameter
Bit rate
Description
SL4
SLD4
622080 kbit/s

5-19
SLQ4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
SL4
SLD4
SLQ4
1 x STM-4 standard
or concatenated
service
2 x STM-4 standard
or concatenated
service
4 x STM-4
standard or
concatenated
service
Line code pattern
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.00
1.01
1.04
Power consumption
(W)
15
15
16
Optical module type
I-4
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Ve-4.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission distance
(km)
02
215
1540
4080
80100
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
15 to 8
3 to 2
3 to 2
3 to 2
(dBm)
23
28
28
28
33
Receiver overload
(dBm)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Minimum extinction
ration (dB)
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 5% to 95%

5-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.4 SL1/SLQ1/SLT1
The SLT1 is a 12 x STM-1 optical processing board. The SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 optical
processing board. The SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 optical processing board.
The three boards are responsible for:
the receiving/transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
the O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
the extracting/inserting of overhead byte
the detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-13 shows the slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-13 Slots for the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Product
SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Note:
To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 40 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to fourth optical
interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 15 or 1416, and the first
to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 68 or
1113.
To the OptiX OSN 3500 with 80 Gbit/s cross-connect capacity, the first to eighth optical
interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 15 or 1416, and the first
to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the SLT1 seats in any of slots 68 or
1113.
To the OptiX OSN 2500, the first to fourth optical interfaces are available when the
SLT1 seats in slot 5 or 6, the first to twelfth optical interfaces are available when the
SLT1 seats in any of slots 78 or 1112, and the first to eight optical interfaces are
available when the SLT1 seats in 13th slot.

5-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.4.1 Functionality
Functionality
SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
Basic
function
Receive/Transmit
twelve STM-1 optical
signals.
Receive/Transmit four
STM-1 optical signals.
Receive/Transmit
one STM-1 optical
signal.
Optical
interface
specifications
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2, and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which
comply with ITU-T Recommendation G.957.
Optical
module
specifications

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at
optical interfaces.
Service
processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services.

Overhead
processing

transmission and termination).
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),

linear MSP and subnetwork connection protection (SNCP).
Maintenance
5.4.2 Principle
Figure 5-7 shows the principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1 (1 x STM-1
signal is processed).

5-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Backplane
STM-1
STM-1
O/E
conversion
module
E/O
conversion
module
Cross-connect unit
Frame
synchronous
and scrambler
module
Overhead
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Logic
control
module
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
SCC
-48 V
+3.3 V
+3.3 V ( Standby )
+3.3 V
Figure 5-7 The principle block diagram of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
The O/E conversion module converts the received STM-1 optical signal into STM-1
electrical signal while extracting clock signal simultaneously, then sends the clock
signal and STM-1 electrical signal to the frame synchronous and scrambler module,
where the R_LOS alarm is checked.
electrical signal, converts it into parallel signal, and sends it to the overhead
processing module, where the R_LOF and R_OOF alarm signals are checked.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received STM-1
signal, and demultiplexes it into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into an
STM-1 signal and inserted with overhead bytes in the overhead processing unit, and
then are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
for the received STM-1 electrical signal, and then sends it to the E/O conversion
module after descrambling.
The E/O conversion module converts the received STM-1 electrical signal into STM-1
optical signal, and then sends it to the fiber for transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
5-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

SLT1/SLQ1/SL1.
Power module
5.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-8 shows the front panels of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
SL1
SLQ1
SLT1
STAT
AC T
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
OUT
OUT1
OUT2
IN2
IN
IN1
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
OUT2
IN4
OUT5
IN2
IN5
OUT6
IN6
OUT3
OUT7
IN7
IN3
OUT8
IN8
OUT9
OUT4
IN9
OUT10
IN4
IN10
OUT11
IN11
OUT12
IN12
SLT1
SLT1
SL1
SLQ1
SLQ1
SL1
Figure 5-8 The front panel of the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.

5-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the SL1, four pairs for the SLQ1, and twelve
pairs for the SLT1
Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces of the SLQ1 and the SL1 incline down. The optical
interfaces of the SLT1 are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm.
The SL1, SLQ1, and SLT1 support swappable optical modules, which simplifies
maintenance.

The major parameters required by the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1 are as follows.
J1
C2
Table 5-14 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SLT1/SLQ1/SL1
Service type
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The versions of the SLQ1 and SL1 are N1 and N2, which can be used in the OptiX
OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).
The two versions realize board functions in the same way. N2SLQ1 supports tandem
connection monitoring (TCM) function, which is not available in version N1. The two
versions can be replaced with each other directly. The direct replacement command
must be delivered in NM after hardware replacing is fulfilled.
The version of the SLT1 is N1, which is the only version existed. The board can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 (A and B).

5-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Note:

Table 5-15 lists the technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1.
Table 5-15 Technical parameters of the SLT1, SLQ1, and SL1
Parameter
Description
SLT1
SLQ1
SL1
4 x STM-1
1 x STM-1
Bit rate
155.52 Mbit/s
Processing
capability
12 x STM-1
Line code pattern
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.22
1.04
1.00
Power
consumption (W)
15
15
14
Optical interface
type
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Ve-1.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission
distance (km)
0 to 2
2 to 15
15 to 40
40 to 80
80 to 100
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
15 to 8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
23
28
34
34
34
Receiver overload
(dBm)
10
10
10
Minimum
extinction ration
(dB)
8.2
8.2
10
10
10
Long-term
operating condition
Short-term
operating condition
Humidity: 5% to 95%

5-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Parameter
Description
SLT1
SLQ1
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
SL1
5.5 R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SL1/R1SLQ1
The R1SLD4 is a 2 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SL4 is a 1 x STM-4 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SLQ1 is a 4 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SL1 is a 1 x STM-1 half-slot optical processing board, used when slots are
segmented.
The R1SLD4 and the R1SL4 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-4 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-4 optical signals
The extracting or inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
The R1SLQ1 and the R1SL1 are responsible for:
The receiving or transmitting of STM-1 optical signals
The O/E conversion of STM-1 optical signals
The extracting/inserting of overhead byte
The detecting of alarms in the line
Table 5-16 lists the slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1 in OSN products.
Table 5-16 Slots for the R1SLD4/R1SL4/R1SLQ1/R1SL1
Product
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
R1SLD4
R1SL4
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 57,
1921
Slots 57,
1921
Slots 7, 21
Slots 57,
1921
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 69,
1213
Slots 69,
1213
Slots 69,
1213
Slots 69,
1213

5-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Product
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
R1SLD4
R1SL4
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 13,
69, 1113
Slots 13,
69, 1113
Slots 13,
1113
Slots 13,
69, 1113
5.5.1 Functionality
Functionality
R1SL4
R1SLD4
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Basic function
Receive/Transmit
1 x STM-4 optical
signal.
Receive/Transmit
2 x STM-4 optical
signals.
Receive/Transmit
4 x STM-1 optical
signals.
Receive/Transmit
1 x STM-1 optical
signal.
Optical
interface
specifications
Support the I-4, S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2,

and Ve-4.2 optical interface, which
comply with ITU-T Recommendation
G.957.
Support the I-1, S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2,

and Ve-1.2 optical interface, which
comply with ITU-T Recommendation
G.957.
Service
processing
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services

and VC-4-4C concatenated services.
Overhead
processing



overheads (transparent transmission
and termination).

overheads (transparent transmission
and termination).
Support setting and querying

J0/J1/C2 byte.
Support setting and querying J0/J1/C2

byte.
Support two-fiber and four-fiber

multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP and SNCP.
Support linear MSP and SNCP.
Protection
schemes
Support MSP or SNCP shared optical

path protection.
Optical
module
specifications

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical
interfaces.
Alarms and
performance
events
Provide abundant alarms and performance events, which simplify maintenance

and administration.
Maintenance


5-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.5.2 Principle
The principle of the R1SLD4/R1SL4 is the same as that of the SL4. Refer to Figure
5-5 for details.
The principle of the R1SLQ1/R1SL1 is the same as that of the SL1. Refer to Figure
5-7 for details.
5.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-9 shows the front panels of the R1SLD4 and R1SL4. Figure 5-10 shows the
front panels of the R1SLQ1 and R1SL1.
R1SL4
R1SLD4
Figure 5-9 The front panel of the R1SL4 and R1SLD4
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Figure 5-10 The front panel of the R1SL1 and R1SLQ1

5-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 are half-slot optical processing boards
whose height is half of the SL4s. They are used when the slots of the OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500 are segmented.
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1.

2. Interfaces
Quantity: one pair of optical interface for the R1SL4, two pairs for the R1SLD4, four
pairs for the R1SLQ1, and one pair for the R1SL1
Type: LC connector
Security: The optical interfaces are vertical to the front panel, indenting by 20 mm.
The R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 support swappable optical modules,
which simplifies maintenance.

The major parameters required by the half-slot optical processing boards are as
follows.
J1
C2
alarm and insert all 1s into the C4. Set C2 according to the actual service type.
Table 5-17 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for half-slot optical processing boards
Service type
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

5-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

The version of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1 is N1, which is the only
version existed. The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A,
and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot segmentation.

The optical interface parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL are the
same as that of the SL4 and SL1. Refer to Table 5-12 and Table 5-15 for details. Table
5-18 lists other technical parameters.
Table 5-18 Technical parameters of the R1SL4, R1SLD4, R1SLQ1, and R1SL1
Parameter
Description
R1SL4
R1SLD4
Bit rate
622.080 Mbit/s
Processing
capability
1 x STM-4
standard or
concatenated
services
Line code pattern
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
155.520 Mbit/s
2 x STM-4
standard or
concatenated
services
Dimensions (mm)
4 x STM-1
standard
services
1 x STM-1
standard
services
H
D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
0.34
0.36
0.4
0.34
Power
consumption (W)
10
11
12
10
Long-term
operating condition
Short-term
operating condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 5% to 95%

5-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8
The SEP1 is an 8 x STM-1 electrical signal processing board, with two STM-1
electrical interfaces on the front panel.
The EU08 and OU08are interface boards of the SEP1. The TSB8 is an electrical
interface switching & bridging board.
Table 5-19 lists the slots for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8 in OSN products.
Table 5-19 Slot for the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
Product
SEP1
(Led out from
front panel)
SEP
(Work with
interface boards)
EU08/OU08
TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Slots 16, 1316
Slots 25, 1316
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29, 31,
33, 35
Slots 19,
35
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
Slots 16, 1316
Slots 25, 1316
Not available
Slots 19,
35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 67, 1213
Slots 3, 15, 17
Slots 1,
17
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not
available
OptiX OSN
1500A
Slots 1213
Not available
Not available
Not
available
OptiX OSN
1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1213
Slots 14, 16
Slots 14
When used with different interface boards and electrical interface switching & bridging
boards, the SEP1 has different access ability, as listed in Table 5-20.
Table 5-20 Different access abilities of the SEP1
When worked with
Access ability
None
Access and process 2 x STM-1 electrical signals.
EU08
Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals.
OU08
Access and process 8 x STM-1 optical signals.
EU08 and TSB8
Access and process 8 x STM-1 electrical signals, and achieve 1:N

(N3) TPS protection.
Caution:
The two interfaces on the front panel of the SEP1 are unavailable when used with
interface boards.

5-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Caution:
The EU08 and OU08 can only be used when the cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s
in OptiX OSN 3500. When the cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the EU04 can be
used to work with the SEP1.
5.6.1 Functionality
Functionality
Basic
function
Optical
interface
specifications
SEP1
EU08/OU08
8 x STM-1
processing board
EU08: 8 x STM-1 electrical

interface board
OU08: 8 x STM-1 optical
interface board
The OU08 supports the I-1
and S-1.1 optical interface,
which complies with ITU-T
TSB8
8-channel electrical
interface switching &
bridging board

Optical
module
specifications

Automatic laser shutdown function can be enabled or disabled at optical
interfaces.
Service
processing

Overhead
processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission

and termination).
Alarms and
performance
events
Protection
scheme

Realize TPS protection when the SEP1 works with interface boards and
switching & bridging boards.
Support two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP and SNCP.
Maintenance

5-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
5.6.2 Principle
Figure 5-11 shows the principle block diagram of the SEP1 (1 x STM-1 signal is
processed).
Backplane
STM-1 O/E signal

Interface
module
Data
recovery
module
STM-1 O/E signal
Cross-connect unit
Frame
synchronous
and scrambler
module
Overhead
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Logic
control
module
+3.3 V Standby
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
SCC
+3.3 VStandby
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 5-11 The principle block diagram of the SEP1
The interface module accesses STM-1 electrical signals (for optical signals, O/E
conversion is needed), and the data recovery module recovers clock signals. Then,
the cock signal and E4/STM-1 electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous
and scrambler module.
electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and then sends them to the
overhead processing module.
The overhead processing module extracts the overhead bytes from the STM-1 signals,
and demultiplexes the signals into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4 signal is then
sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit are multiplexed into
STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and sent to the frame synchronous
and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes.
for the received STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface module
after scrambling.
The interface module sends the STM-1 electrical signals to the cable for transmission.
When optical signals are required, the interface module adopts the OU08, where the
signals are sent to fiber after E/O conversion.

5-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
collects and reports alarms and performance events.
process the configuration command from NM.
Power module
5.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 5-12 shows the front panels of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.
SEP1
EU08
OU08
TSB8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EU08
EU08
OUT1IN1OUT2IN2OUT3IN3OUT4IN4OUT5IN5OUT6IN6OUT7IN7OUT8IN8
SEP1
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
SEP1
OU08
OU08 (LC)
TSB8
TSB8
Figure 5-12 The front panel of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.

5-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards

There are no indicators on the EU08, OU08, or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
Quantity: The SEP1 has two pair of 75-ohm SMB interface, with which the SEP1 can
access two channels of STM-1 electrical signal by itself.
Type: SMB connector
Table 5-21 lists the quantity and type of the interfaces of the EU08 and OU08.
Table 5-21 Interfaces of the EU08 and OU08
Interface
EU08
N1OU08
N2OU08
Quantity
Access ability
8 x STM-1(e)
8 x STM-1(o)
8 x STM-1(o)
Type
8-pair SMB electrical

interface
8-pair LC optical
interface
8-pair SC optical
interface
Swappable optical
module
Supported
Not supported
The N1OU08 supports swappable optical modules, which simplifies the maintenance
to optical modules.
There is no service interfaces on the TSB8.

When used with the EU08 and TSB8, the SEP1 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 8
x STM-1 electrical signals. Table 5-22 lists the TPS protection of the SEP1 in OSN
products.
Table 5-22 TPS protection of the SEP1
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Support two groups of

1:N (N3) TPS protection
The board in slot 2 protects the boards in

slots 3, 4, and 5.
The board in slot 16 protects the boards
in slots 13, 14, and 15.
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500
Support two groups of 1:1

TPS protection
The board in slot 6 protects the one in

slot 7.
slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN
1500A
Not supported

5-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN
1500B
Support one group of 1:1

TPS protection

slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the

protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated
network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
1. Protection Principle
Figure 5-13 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SEP1 is used with the EU08 and
TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
8 x STM-1(e)
TSB8
8 x STM-1(e)
EU08
8 x STM-1(e)
Switch control
signal
EU08
EU08
Cross
connect
board
SLOT 9/10
Protection
SEP1
Working
SEP1
Working
Working
SEP1
SEP1
Fail
SLOT 2
SLOT 3
SLOT 4
SLOT 5
Figure 5-13 1:3 TPS protection of the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SEP1 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the EU08.
Switching status
When a working SEP1 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the following
manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
the TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
EU08 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.

5-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
2. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 3500
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SEP1, the
relation between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-14.
AUX
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
10
FAN
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O OOOOO OO
T T T T T T T T
11 1213141516 1718
SCC
Protection 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Protection 1
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
TSB8
EU08
S
L
O
T
3
XCS
S
L
O
T
2
FAN
EU08
PIU
S
L
O
T
1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S
L
O
T
37
EU08
S S S SS SS S
L L L LL LL L
O O O OO OO O
T T T TT TT T
2930313233343536
EU08
S S
L
L
O O
T T
27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S
L L L L LL L L
O O O O OO O O
T T T T TT T T
1920212223242526
Fiber routing
In the Figure 5-14, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the
board in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is shown in Table 5-23.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SEP1
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
Working SEP1
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
EU08
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the

5-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
Protection 2
SAP
S
L
O
T
11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
5 SDH Boards
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Fiber Routing
PIU
(SLOT22)
FAN
(SLOT24)
FAN
(SLOT25)
PIU
(SLOT23)
In the above figure, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot
13 protects the one in slot 12.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SEP1
Slot 6
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
Working SEP1
Slot 7
Slot 12
EU08
Slot 3
Slot 15
4. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500B
When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SEP1, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 5-16.
Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15
Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 12 Protection Slot 7
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 5-16 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SEP1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.

5-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Table 5-25 Slot assignment of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
Protection SEP1
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 14
Working SEP1
Slot 13
EU08
Slot 16

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SEP1.
J1
C2
Table 5-26 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SEP1
Service type
C2 setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The version of the SEP1, EU08, and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed.
The boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN
1500B.
The OU08 has version N1 and version N2. The optical interface of version N1 is of LC
connector, and that of version N2 is of SC connector. The two versions provide the
same functions.

Table 5-27 lists the technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8.

5-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

5 SDH Boards
Table 5-27 Technical parameters of the SEP1, EU08, OU08, and TSB8
Parameter
Description
SEP1
EU08
OU08
TSB8
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
Access
capability
2 channels of
electrical signals
8 channels of
electrical
signals
8 channels of
optical signals
Processing
capability
8 x STM-1
Line code
pattern
CMI
Connector
SMB
Dimensions
(mm)
262.05 (H) x 220

(D) x 25.4 (W)
NRZ
SMB
LC or SC
H
D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
0.95
0.41
0.41
0.28
Power
consumption
(W)
17
11
Optical module
type
I-1,
Wavelength
(nm)
1310
Transmission
distance (km)
015
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
38
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

5-41
S-1.1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
PDH Boards
This chapter introduces the PDH boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN 1500 in terms of:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
The PDH boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 are listed in Table 4-2.
6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8
The SPQ4 is a 4 x E4/STM-1(e) processing board. The MU04 is a 4 x E4/STM-1
interface board.
The SPQ4 works with the MU04 to access and process 4 x E4/STM-1 electrical
signals. The SPQ4 and MU04 work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection.
Table 6-1 lists the slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8.
Table 6-1 Slots for the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8
Product
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Slots 25, 1316
Slots 19, 21, 23,

25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
Slots 25, 1316
Slots 19, 21, 23,

25, 29, 31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 67, 1213
Slots 1, 3, 15, 17
Slots 1, 17
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
Not available
Not available

6-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Product
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1213
Slots 14, 16
Slot 14
6.1.2 Functionality
Functionality
SPQ4
MU04
TSB8
Basic
function
4 x E4/STM-1(e)
processing board
4 x E4/STM-1(e)
interface board
8-channel electrical
interface switching &
bridging board
Service
processing
Access and process 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals. Each path can carry

both E4 and STM-1 electrical signals.
Support VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services
Overhead
processing
Support the processing of the section overheads of STM-1 signals,

including B1, B2, K1, K2, M1, F1, and D1D12.
transmission and termination), including J1, B3, C2, G1, and H4.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
The SPQ4 supports TPS protection when working with interface

boards and switching & bridging boards.
Supports two-fiber unidirectional multiplex section protection (MSP),
linear MSP, and SNCP.
Maintenance

6.1.3 Principle
Figure 6-1 shows the functional block diagram of the SPQ4.

6-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Backplane
E4/STM-1
electrical signal
E4/STM-1
electrical signal
Interface
module
(MU04)
Cross-connect unit
Frame
synchronous
and scrambler
module
Data
recovery
module
Overhead
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Logic
control
module
SCC
+3.3 VStandby
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 6-1 The functional block diagram of the SPQ4
The interface unit (MU04) accesses E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then the data
recovery module recovers the clock signal. Then, the clock signal and E4/STM-1
electrical signals are sent to the frame synchronous and scrambler module.
The frame synchronous and scrambler module descrambles the received E4/STM-1
electrical signals, converts it into parallel signals, and sends them to the overhead
processing module.
The overhead processing module extracts overhead bytes from the received
E4/STM-1 signals, and demultiplexes them into one channel of VC-4 signal. The VC-4
signal is then sent to the cross-connect unit through the backplane.
The one channel of VC-4 signal from the cross-connect unit is multiplexed into
E4/STM-1 signals in the overhead processing unit, and then sent to the frame
synchronous and scrambler module after being inserted with overhead bytes.
for the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals, and then sends them to the interface unit
after scrambling.
The interface unit sends the received E4/STM-1 electrical signals into the cable for
transmission.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
communicates with the SCC and other boards through Ethernet ports.
collects and reports alarms and performance events.
process the configuration command from NM.

6-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Power module
6.1.4 Front Panel

Figure 6-2 shows the front panel of the SPQ4 and the MU04.
SPQ4
MU04
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4
SPQ4
SPQ4
MU04
MU04
Figure 6-2 The front panel of the SPQ4 and MU04
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the SEP1.

There are no indicators on the MU04 or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the SPQ4, the SPQ4 should work with the MU04 to
input/output E4/STM-1 signals.
Table 6-2 describes interfaces on the MU04.

6-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Table 6-2 Interfaces on the MU04
Interface
MU04
Access service
4 x E4/STM-1
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type
SMB

When used with the MU04 and TSB8, the SPQ4 can achieve 1:N TPS protection for 4
x E4/STM-1 electrical signals. Table 6-3 lists the TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the
OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-3 The TPS protection of the SPQ4
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)


OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500

TPS protection

slot 7.
slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN
1500A
Not supported
OptiX OSN
1500B

TPS protection

slot 13.
As an equipment level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the

protection board upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated
network-level protections effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
Figure 6-3 shows the 1:3 TPS protection when the SPQ4 is used with the MU04 and
TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500.

6-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
4 E4/STM-1
TSB8
4 E4/STM-1
MU04
4 E4/STM-1
Switch
control
MU04 signal
MU04
Crossconnect
and timing
board
Slot 9/10
Protection
Working
Working
Working
SPQ4
SPQ4
SPQ4
SPQ4
Fail
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Figure 6-3 The 1:3 TPS protection of the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Normal status
When each working board is working normally, the service signal is accessed to the
SPQ4 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the MU04.
Switching status
When a working SPQ4 fails, the working board in each slot is protected in the
following manners.
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of
MU04 switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8
does not act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:3 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the

6-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
AUX
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
10
FAN
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O OOOOO OO
T T T T T T T T
11 1213141516 1718
SCC
Protection 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Protection 1
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
TSB8
EU08
S
L
O
T
3
XCS
S
L
O
T
2
FAN
EU08
PIU
S
L
O
T
1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S
L
O
T
37
EU08
S S S SS SS S
L L L LL LL L
O O O OO OO O
T T T TT TT T
2930313233343536
EU08
S S
L
L
O O
T T
27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S
L L L L LL L L
O O O O OO O O
T T T T TT T T
1920212223242526
Fiber routing
In Figure 6-4, the board in slot 2 protects the boards in slots 3, 4, and 5, and the board
in slot 16 protects the ones in slots 13, 14, and 15.
The slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 is shown in Table 6-4.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SPQ4
Slot 2
Slot 16
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
Working SPQ4
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
EU04
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
When the equipment is configured as two-group 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the

6-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
Protection 2
SAP
S
L
O
T
11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
6 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Fiber Routing
PIU
(SLOT22)
FAN
(SLOT24)
FAN
(SLOT25)
PIU
(SLOT23)
In Figure 6-5, the board in slot 6 protects the one in slot 7, and the board in slot 13
protects the one in slot 12.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Protection SPQ4
Slot 6
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
Working SPQ4
Slot 7
Slot 12
MU04
Slot 3
Slot 15
When the equipment is configured as 1:1 TPS protection for the SPQ4, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Figure 6-6.
Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15
Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 6
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-6 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS for the SPQ4 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the above figure, the board in slot 12 protects the one in slot 13.

6-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Table 6-6 Slot assignment of the SPQ4, MU04, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
Protection SPQ4
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 14
Working SPQ4
Slot 13
MU04
Slot 16

The following parameters should be set through the NM for the SPQ4.
J1
C2
C2 is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frames and the
Table 6-7 Relationship between C2 setting and service type for the SPQ4
Service type
C2 setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s or 45 Mbit/s into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s into C-4
No service
Unequipped

The SPQ4 has version N1 and version N2. The two versions are different in the
internal modules used, but realize functions in the same way. The two versions can be
used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B. The two
versions can be replaced by each other in products of version V100R003.
The version of the MU04 and TSB8 is N1, which is the only version existed. The
boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 6-8 lists the technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04.

6-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Table 6-8 Technical parameters of the SPQ4 and MU04
Parameter
Description
SPQ4
MU04
Bit rate
139264 kbit/s, 155520 kbit/s
Process
capability
Process 4 x E4/STM-1(e)
signals
Line code pattern
CMI
Connector
None
SMB
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Access 4 x E4/STM-1(e) signals
H
D
W
Weight (kg)
0.91
0.41
Power
consumption (W)
24
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

6-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
6.2 PL3/PD3/PL3A/C34S/D34S
The PL3 is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PD3 is a 6 x E3/DS3 processing board.
The PL3A is a 3 x E3/DS3 processing board with cables led out from the front
panel.
The C34S is a 3 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The D34S is a 6 x E3/DS3 PDH interface switching board.
The PL3/PD3 works with the D34S to access and process 3/6 x E3 electrical signals.
The PL3 works with the C34S to access and process 3 x E3 electrical signals .The
PL3/PD3 and C34S/D34S work with the TSB8 to provide 1:N TPS protection.
Table 6-9 lists the slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8 on the OptiX
OSN products.
Table 6-9 Slots for the PL3, PL3A, PD3, C34S, D34S, and TSB8
Product
PL3/PD3
PL3A
C34S
D34S
TSB8
OptiX OSN
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
Slots 25,
1316
Slots 18,
1117
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
Slots 19,
35
OptiX OSN
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
Slots 25,
1316
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
Slots 19,
35
OptiX OSN
2500
Slots 67,
1213
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 1, 3, 15,
17
Slots 1, 3, 15,
17
Slots 1,
17
OptiX OSN
2500 REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not available
Not
available
OptiX OSN
1500A
Not available
Slots 1213
Not available
Not available
Not
available
OptiX OSN
1500B
Slots 1213
Slots 1113
Slots 14, 16
Slots 14, 16
Slot 14
6.2.1 Functionality
Functionality
PL3
PD3
PL3A
C34S
D34S
TSB8
Basic function
3 x E3
processin
g board
6 x E3
processin
g board
3 x E3
processin
g board
(led out
from front
panel)
3x
E3/DS3
PDH
interface
switching
board
6x
E3/DS3
PDH
interface
switching
board
8-chann
el
electrical
interface
switching
&
bridging
board
Service
processing
Access and process E3/DS3 signals.

6-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Overhead
processing
Support the setting and querying of all path overheads at VC-3 level.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
The PL3/PD3 supports TPS protection when working with interface boards
and switching & bridging boards.
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at electrical interfaces.

Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level and locate faults quickly.
Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset does not affect services.
6.2.2 Principle
Figure 6-7 shows the functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A (one
channel of E3/DS3 signal is processed).
Backplane
D34S/D34S
E3/DS3
Decoder
Mapping
Encoder
Demapping
Interface
module
D34S/D34S
E3/DS3
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
Logic
control
module
SCC
+3.3 V Standby
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
-48 V
+3.3 V
Figure 6-7 The functional block diagram of the PD3, PL3, and PL3A
The E3/DS3 signal is accessed, through the interface module, into the decoder, where
6-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
NRZ data signal and clock signal are recovered after decoding. Then, the signal is
sent to the mapping module.
In the mapping module, the E3/DS3 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-3, and
formed as VC-3 after path overhead processing, as TU-3 after pointer processing, and
finally as VC-4 after multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the cross-connect unit.
Figure 6-8 shows the mapping process.
VC-4
x3
TUG-3
TU-3
VC-3
C-3
44736 kbit/s
or
34368 kbit/s
Figure 6-8 The mapping and multiplexing process of E3/DS3 signals
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signals from the VC-4 signal
from the cross-connect unit, and then sends them to the encoder, where E3 or DS3
signals are output.
3. Auxiliary Units

This unit:
Enables the communication between the boards and the SCC.
Collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
Processes the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module
6.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-9 shows the front panel of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S.

6-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
PL3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PD3
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PL3A
D34S
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3
PL3
PL3
PD3
PD3
PL3A
PL3A
D34S
C34S
D34S
Figure 6-9 The front panel of the PD3, PL3, PL3A, C34S and D34S

6-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PL3, PD3, and PL3A.
Board hardware status indicator (STAT) double colours (red, green)
Board software status indicator (PROG) double colours (red, green)
Service alarm indicator (SRV) triple colours (red, green, and yellow)

There are no indicators on the C34S, D34S or TSB8.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PL3 or PD3. The board should work with the D34S to
input or output E3/DS3 signals.
There are three pairs of 75-ohm SMB unbalanced interfaces on the front panel of the
PL3A.
Table 6-10 describes interfaces on the D34S.
Table 6-10 Interfaces on the D34S
Interface
C34S
D34S
Access service
3 x E3/DS3
6 x E3/DS3
Interface
75 ohm unbalanced interface
Interface type
SMB
Corresponding processing board
PL3, PD3

The PL3/PD3 works with the C34S/D34S and TSB8 to achieve 1:N protection for 3/6 x
E3/DS3 signals. Table 6-11 lists the TPS protection of the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 6-11 The TPS protection of the PL3/PD3
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)

1:N (N3) TPS
protection.


TPS protection.

slot 7.
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500


slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500
REG
Not supported.
OptiX OSN
Not supported.

6-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
1500A
OptiX OSN
1500B

TPS protection.

slot 13.
As equipment-level protection, the TPS protection switches signals to the protection board
upon the failure of the working board. This avoids complicated network-level protections
effectively, and enhances the reliability of the equipment.
The protection principle of the PL3 is the same as that of the PD3. Figure 6-10 shows
the principle of 1:3 TPS for the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500.
6 x E3/DS3
TSB8
1 2
6 x E3/DS3
D34S
6 x E3/DS3
Switch
control
D34S signal
D34S
2
Crossconnect
unit
SLOT 9/10
Protection
PD3
Working
PD3
Working
PD3
Working
PD3
Fail
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 4
Slot 5
Figure 6-10 The 1:3 TPS protection of the PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500

6-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Normal status
When each working board works normally, the service signal is accessed to the
corresponding PD3 directly through position 1 of the control switch on the D34S.
Switching status
When a working PD3 failure is detected, the working board in each slot is protected in
the following manners.
When the working board in slot 3 fails, the control switch of the corresponding D34S
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the
TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 3. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 3.
switches from position 1 to position 2. At the same time, the control switch of the
TSB8 switches from position 1 to position 2. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 4.
switches from position 1 to position 2, while the control switch of the TSB8 does not
act. Slot 2 is now protecting slot 5.
Table 6-12 shows the relation between the working board and protection board when
the equipment is configured as 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3 or PD3.
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
As shown in Figure 6-11.
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)

6-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
AUX
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
FAN
S
L
O
T
10
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O OOOOO OO
T T T T T T T T
11 1213141516 1718
SCC
Protection 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 2
Working 1
Working 1
Working 1
Protection 1
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
TSB8
EU08
S
L
O
T
3
FAN
XCS
S
L
O
T
2
EU08
PIU
S
L
O
T
1
EU08
TSB8
FAN
PIU
S
L
O
T
37
EU08
S S S SS SS S
L L L LL LL L
O O O OO OO O
T T T TT TT T
2930313233343536
EU08
S S
L
L
O O
T T
27 28
EU08
S S S S SS S S
L L L L LL L L
O O O O OO O O
T T T T TT T T
1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 6-11 Board layout upon 1:3 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 3500
In the figure, slot 2 protects slots 3, 4, and 5, and slot 16 protects slots 13, 14, and 15.
Table 6-13 shows the slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
PL3/PD3 (protection board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
PL3/PD3 (working board)
Slots 3, 4, 5
Slots 13, 14, 15
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
D34S
Slots 21, 23, 25
Slots 29, 31, 33
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)

6-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
Protection 2
SAP
S
L
O
T
11
CXL16
CXL16
Working 1
Protection 1
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working 2
6 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
Figure 6-12 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 n the OptiX OSN 2500
In the figure, slot 6 protects slot7, and slot 13 protects slots 12.
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
Slot 6
Slot 13
Slot 7
Slot 12
TSB8
Slot 1
Slot 17
D34S
Slot 3
Slot 15
Table 6-16 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:1 TPS in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (E3)
PL3 (DS3)
PL3 (DS3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (E3)
PD3 (DS3)
PD3 (DS3)

6-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15
Slot 16
EU08
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 2
Slot 3
Slot 13 Working
Slot 4
Slot 5
Slot 6
Slot 8
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-13 Board layout upon 1:1 TPS protection for the PL3/PD3 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
In the figure, slot 12 protects slot 13.

Table 6-17 Slot assignment of the PL3/PD3, D34S, and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 1500B in the OptiX OSN
1500B
Board
Protection group
Slot 12
Slot 13
TSB8
Slot 14
D34S
Slot 16

The following parameters should be set on the T2000 for the PL3/PD3.
Load indication
When the service channel does not process the services it carries, select Do not
load. Otherwise, select Load.
Tributary loopback
The tributary loopback function is generally used to locate faults for each service
channel.
The tributary loopback is a diagnosis function, which may interrupt services on
relevant channels.
Channel service type
E3 or DS3 can be selected on the T2000 according to the input service type.

Version N1 is the only version for the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, D34S, and TSB8. The
boards can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and
OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 6-18 lists the technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S, and D34S.
6-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Table 6-18 Technical parameters of the PL3, PD3, PL3A, C34S and D34S
Parameter
PL3
PD3
Description
PL3A
C34S
D34S
Bit rate
34368 kbit/s or 44736 kbit/s
3x
E3/DS3
6x
E3/DS3
3x
E3/DS3
None
None
Access capability
3x
E3/DS3
3x
E3/DS3
6x
E3/DS3
Line code pattern
E3:HDB3, DS3:B3ZS
Connector
None
SMB
SMB
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
None
H
D
W
262.05
(H) x 110
(D) x 22
(W)
262.05
(H) x 110
(D) x 22
(W)
Weight (kg)
1.00
1.12
1.00
0.31
0.38
15
19
15
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for
transportation

Humidity: 10%100%

6-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
6.3 PQ1/PQM/D75S/D12S/D12B
The PQ1 is a 63 x E1 processing board.
The PQM is a 63 x E1/T1 processing board.
The D75S is a 32 x 75 ohm E1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12S is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface switching board.
The D12B is a 32 x 120 ohm E1/T1 PDH interface board.
Table 6-19 lists slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B in the OptiX OSN
products.
Table 6-19 Slots for the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Product
PQ1/PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
Slots 15, 1316
Slots 1926, 2936
Slots 15, 1316
Slots 1926, 2936
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 57,1213
Slots 14,1518
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1417
Table 6-20 shows the difference between the PQ1 and PQM.
Table 6-20 Comparison between the PQ1 and PQM
Board
PQ1
PQM
63 x E1
63 x E1/T1
Interface board (providing

TPS)
2 x D75S or 2 x D12S
2 x D12S
Interface board (NOT

providing TPS)
2 x D12B, 2 x D75S or 2
x D12S
2 x D12B or 2 x D12S
Comparison
6.3.1 Functionality
Functionality
PQ1
PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
Basic function
63 x E1 processing
board
63 x E1/T1
processing board
E1/T1 interface board
Service
processing
Refer to Table 6-21 for

details.
When working with interface boards, the PQ1 can access and process
63 x E1 signals.
When working with interface boards, the PQM can access and process
63 x E1/T1 signals.

6-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Functionality
PQ1
PQM
D75S/D12S/D12B
Overhead
processing
Support the processing of the path overheads (transparent transmission

and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
The PQ1/PQM supports TPS protection when working with interface

boards and switching & bridging boards.
Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection, with
switching time less than 50ms.
Maintenance

6.3.2 Principle
Figure 6-14 shows the functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM (one channel of
E1/T1 signal is processed).
Backplane
D75S/D12S/ E1/T1
D12B
Decoder
Mapping
Encoder
Demapping
Interface
module
D75S/D12S/
D12B
E1/T1
Logic
control
module
Cross-connect unit
Cross-connect unit
SCC
+3.3 VStandby
+5 V
+2.7 V
Power
module
+3.3 V
Figure 6-14 The functional block diagram of the PQ1/PQM

6-23
-48 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
The input E3/DS3 signal enters, through the interface module, the decoder, where
HDB3 or B8ZS data signal and clock signal are recovered. Then, the signal is sent to
the mapping module.
In the mapping module, the E1/T1 signal is mapped asynchronously to C-12, and
formed as VC-12 after channel overhead processing, as TU-12 after pointer
processing, and finally as VC-4 through multiplexing. Then, the signal is sent to the
cross-connect unit. The mapping process is shown in Figure 6-15.
x3
VC-4
TUG-3
x7
TUG-2
x3
TU-12
VC-12
C-12
12
2048 kbit/s
or
1544 kbit/s
Figure 6-15 The mapping and multiplexing process of E1/T1 signals
The demapping module extracts binary data and clock signal from the VC-4 signal
from the cross-connect unit, and sends the signal to the encoder, where E1 or T1
signals are output.
3. Auxiliary Units
This unit:
communicates the board with the SCC.
collects and reports alarms and performance events to the SCC.
process the configuration command from the SCC.
Power module
6.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-16 shows the front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.

6-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
PQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PQM
18
18
18
916
916
916
1724
1724
1724
2532
2532
2532
PQM
D75S
D12S
PQM
D75S
D12S
PQ1
PQ1
D12B
D12S
D75S
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
D12B
D12B
Figure 6-16 The front panel of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PQ1 and PQM.

There are no indicators on the D75S, D12S, or D12B.
2. Interfaces
There are no interfaces on the PQ1 or PQM. The board should work with the D75S,
D12S, or D12B to input/output E1/T1 signals.
Table 6-21 shows the difference between the D75S, D12S, and D12B.
Table 6-21 Comparison between the D75S, D12S, and D12B
Comparison
Board
Access capability
D75S
D12S
D12B
32 x E1
32 x E1/T1
32 x E1/T1

6-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
D75S
D12S
D12B
Interface
75 ohm
unbalanced
interface
120 ohm
balanced
interface
120 ohm balanced

interface
Interface type
DB44
DB44
DB44
Comparison
Board

The PQ1 and PQM work with the D75S or D12S to achieve 1:N TPS protection for 63
x E1/T1 signals. Table 6-22 shows the TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM in the
OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-22 The TPS protection of the PQ1 and PQM
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Support one group of 1:N

(N8) TPS protection
The board in slot 1 protects the ones in

slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
OptiX OSN 2500

(N4) TPS protection

slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN
1500A
Not supported
OptiX OSN
1500B

(N2) TPS protection
The board in slot 11 protects the ones

in slots 12 and 13.
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
The protection principle of the PQ1 is the same with that of the PQM. Figure 6-17
shows the protection principle of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500.

6-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
S
L
O
E1 protection bus
T
1
9
S
L
O
T
2
0
S
L
O
T
2
1
S
L
O
T
2
2
S
L
O
T
2
3
S
L
O
T
2
4
S
L
O
T
2
5
S
L
O
T
2
6
S
L
O
T
2
9
S
L
O
T
3
0
S
L
O
T
3
1
S
L
O
T
3
2
S
L
O
T
3
3
S
L
O
T
3
4
S
L
O
T
3
5
S
L
O
T
3
6
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
E1
service bus
S
L
O
T
1
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
1
3
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
1
4
S
L
O
T
1
5
S
L
O
T
1
6
Fail
Protection
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
PQ1
Detect
board
fault
Cross-connect and timing board
TPS switching
control bus
Figure 6-17 The 1:8 TPS protection of the PQ1 in the OptiX OSN 3500
When detecting a working PQ1 is faulty, the cross-connect board delivers the service
switching command to control the interface board to switch the faulty board to
protection board, thus achieving the protection of services.
When the equipment is configured as with 1:8 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM, the relation
between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-23.
Working board
Protection board
Slot configuration
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM
The board in slot 1 is a protection

board, protecting the boards in
slots 2, 3, 4, 5, 13, 14, 15, and 16.
PQM
PQM
Figure 6-18 shows the slots for the

working and the protection boards.

6-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
S S
L
L
O O
T T
27 28
S S S SS SS S
L L L LL LL L
O O O OO OO O
T T T TT TT T
2930313233343536
S
L
O
T
37
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
PIU
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
AUX
FAN
S
L
O
T
3
S
L
O
T
4
S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
10
FAN
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O OOOOO OO
T T T T T T T T
11 1213141516 1718
SCC
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Working
Protection
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S
L
O
T
2
FAN
XCS
S
L
O
T
1
PIU
S S S S SS S S
L L L L LL L L
O O O O OO O O
T T T T TT T T
1920212223242526
Fiber routing
between the working and the protection board is shown in Table 6-24.
Working board
Protection board
Slot
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (75 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm)
PQ1 (120 ohm) or PQM
The board in slot 5 is a protection

board, protecting the boards in
slots 6, 7, 12, and 13.
PQM
PQM
Figure 6-19 shows the slots for the

working and the protection boards.

6-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
Working
SAP
S
L
O
T
11
CXL16
CXL16
Working
Working
Protection
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Working
6 PDH Boards
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
between the working board and protection board is shown in Table 6-25.
Table 6-25 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS for the PQ1 or PQM in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
Protection group
PQ1/PQM (protection)
Slot 11
PQ1/PQM (working)
Slots 12, 13
D75S/D12S
Slots 14, 15, 16, 17

The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PQ1 or PQM.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access
point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the
transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.

Version N1 is the only version of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B. The boards
can be used in the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500B.

Table 6-26 lists the technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B.
Table 6-26 Technical parameters of the PQ1, PQM, D75S, D12S, and D12B
Parameter
Bit rate
Description
PQ1
PQM
2048
kbit/s
D75S
1544 kbit/s or 2048 kbit/s

6-29
D12S
D12B
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Parameter
Description
PQ1
PQM
D75S
D12S
D12B
Processing
capability
63 x E1
63 x
E1/T1
Support
TPS
Support
TPS
Not support
TPS
Accessing
capability
32 x E1
32 x
E1/T1
32 x E1/T1
Line code pattern
E1: HDB3, T1: B8ZS, AMI (Alternate Mark Inversion)
Connector
None
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x

25.4 (W)
None
DB44
DB44
DB44
H
D
262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.01
1.01
0.35
0.35
0.31
Power
consumption (W)
19
22
5.5
Long-term
operating condition
Short-term
operating condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

6-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
6.4 PD1/PL1/L75S/L12S
The PD1 is a 32 x E1 half-slot processing board. It is used with the L75S or L12S in
the OptiX OSN 1500A and used with D75S or D12S in the OptiX OSN 2500 and
1500B.
The PL1A is a 16 x E1(75-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out
from the front panel.
The PL1B is a 16 x E1 (120-ohm) half-slot processing board, with signals led out
from the front panel.
The L75S is a 16 x E1 interface switching board (75-ohm). It is only used in the

OptiX OSN 1500A.
The L12S is a 16 x E1/T1 interface switching board (120-ohm). It is only used in the
OptiX OSN 1500A.
Note:
When the impedance of interfaces is ignored, the PL1A and PL1B are called PL1
hereinafter.
Table 6-27 lists slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 6-27 Slots for the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Product
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
OptiX OSN 3500

(80Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 3500

(40Gbit/s)
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 57, 1921
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not available
Not available
Not available
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 2, 12 (after slot

segmentation)
Slots 69
Slots 67
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 13, 68, 1113

(after slot
segmentation)
Slots 69
Not available
6.4.1 Functionality
Functionality
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
Basic function
32 x E1 processing
board
16 x E1 processing
board
E1/T1 interface
board

6-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Functionality
PD1
PL1
L75S/L12S
Service processing
When working with interface boards, the PD1 can access and
process 32 x E1 signals. The PL1 accesses and processes 16 x E1
signals directly.
Overhead
processing

transmission and termination) at VC-12 level, such as J2.
Alarms and
performance
events

Protection
schemes
The PD1 supports TPS protection when working with interface

switching boards.
Support multiple protection schemes, such as SNCP protection,
with switching time less than 50ms.
Maintenance

Support warm and cold reset. Warm reset brings no impact to
services.
6.4.2 Principle
The working principle of the PD1 and PL1 is the same as that of the PQ1. Refer to
section 6.3.2 Principle for details.
6.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 6-20 shows the front panel of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.
PD1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PL1
L12S
L12S
1-16
PL1
1-16
1-16
PD1
L75S
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
L75S
Figure 6-20 The front panel of the PD1, PL1, L12S and L75S

6-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the PD1 and PL1.

There are no indicators on the L75S and L12S.
2. Interfaces
In the OptiX OSN 1500A, the PD1 works with the L75S or L12S to input/output E1
signals. In the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500B, the PD1 working with the
D75S or D12S to input/output E1 signals. Refer to section 6.3.3 for details on the
D75S and D12S.
Table 6-28 compares the PL1, L75S, and L12S.
Table 6-28 Comparison between the PL1, L75S, and L12S
L75S
L12S
PL1
Access capability
16 x E1
16 x E1
16 x E1
Interface
75 ohm
unbalanced
interface
120 ohm
balanced
interface
75/120 ohm
unbalanced/balance
d interface
Interface type
2mmHM
2mmHM
2mmHM
Comparison
Board

The PD1 and PL1 can only be used in the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The
PD1 works with L75S/D75S or L12S/D12S to achieve 1:N protection to E1 signals.
Table 6-29 shows the TPS protection of the PD1.
Table 6-29 The TPS protection of the PD1
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Not supported


slots 6 and 7.
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500

in slots 20 and 21.
OptiX OSN 2500
REG
Not supported

6-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Product
TPS protection
TPS configuration
OptiX OSN
1500A

TPS protection

slot 12.
OptiX OSN
1500B

at most

slots 2 and 3.
in slots 12 and 13.
slots 7 and 8.
The latter two groups in the above
groups cannot coexist.
The TPS protection principle of the PD1 is the same as that of the PQ1.
The 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 2500
performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-21 shows the board distribution.
S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 19 20 21
S S S
L L L
O O O
T T T
8 9 10
S
L
O
T
11
S
L
O
T
12
S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
S
L
O
T
15
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
SAP
S
L
O
T
7
CXL16
S
L
O
T
6
CXL16
D75S
D75S
D75S
D75S
P2 W2 W2
S
L
O
T
5
P1 W1 W1
Fiber Routing
PIU
(SLOT22)
FAN
(SLOT24)
FAN
(SLOT25)
PIU
(SLOT23)
Figure 6-21 Board distribution upon 1:2 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 2500
Table 6-30 lists slots for the working, protection, and interface switching board of the
PD1.
Table 6-30 Relation between working and protection boards upon 1:2 TPS of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN
2500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
PD1 (protection)
Slots 5
Slot 19
PD1 (working)
Slots 6, 7
Slots 20, 21
D75S/D12S
Slots 2, 4
Slots 1, 3

6-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500A
The 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 can be achieved after the OptiX OSN 1500A
performs slot segmentation. Figure 6-22 shows the board distribution.
Slot 1
Slot 20
PD1(P) Slot 2
Slot 3
FAN
Slot 11
Slot 6 L75S(17~32)
Slot 12 PD1(W)
Slot 7 L75S(1~16)
Slot 13
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 6-22 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1
Table 6-31 shows the slot assignment of the working and the protection board of the
PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B.
Table 6-31 Slot assignment upon 1:1 TPS protection of the PD1 in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Board
PD1
(protection)
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
PD1 (working)
Slots 12, 13
Slots 7, 8
Slots 2, 3
Slots 12, 13
Slots 7, 8
D75S/D12S
Slots 15, 17
Slots 15, 17
Slots 14, 16
Slots 15, 17
Slots 15, 17
Note: The protection group with slot 6 and that with slot 11 cannot coexist, because the two
groups share protection bus. The OptiX OSN 1500B supports one group of TPS protection to
E1 signals before slot segmentation, and supports two groups after slot segmentation.

The following parameter should be set through the NM for the PD1 or PL1.
J2
It is the VC-12 path trace byte. Successive transmission of the lower order access
point identifier through J2 helps the receive end learn that its connection with the
transmit end in this path is in continuous connection status.

Version N1 is the only version of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S. The boards can be
used in the OptiX OSN 2500, OptiX OSN 1500A, and OptiX OSN 1500B after slot
segmentation.
The PL1 has PL1A and PL1B. A indicates the interface impedance is 75 ohm, and B
indicates the interface impedance is 120 ohm.

Table 6-32 lists the technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S.

6-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

6 PDH Boards
Table 6-32 Technical parameters of the PD1, PL1, L75S, and L12S
Parameter
Description
PD1
PL1
Bit rate
2048 kbit/s
2048 kbit/s
Processing
capability
32 x E1
Accessing
capability
Line code
pattern
E1: HDB3
Connector
None
Dimensions
(mm)
L75S
L12S
16 x E1
TPS
TPS
16 x E1
(75-ohm)
16 x E1
(120-ohm)
2mmHM
2mmHM
2mmHM
H
D
111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
0.50
0.45
0.24
0.27
Power
consumption
(W)
15
6.7
2.7
4.5
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

6-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Data Processing Boards
This chapter introduces data processing boards of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500, including Ethernet data processing boards, ATM data
processing boards and Ethernet data interface boards as follows.
Ethernet transparent transmission board EFT4/EFT8/EGT2
Ethernet switching processing board EFS4/EFS0/EGS2
Ethernet board with RPR function EMR0/EGR2
ATM service processing board ADL4/ADQ1
ATM service processing board with IMA function IDL4/IDQ1
Multi-service transparent transmission processing board MST4
Ethernet data interface board EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
Refer to Table 4-3 for the name and descriptions of the data processing boards
supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.

7-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
The EGT2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT8 is an 8/16-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet transparent transmission board.
The EFT4 (seated in the half-height slot) is a 4-port 100 Mbit/s Fast Ethernet
transparent transmission board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
Table 7-1 shows the slots for the EGT2, EFT8, EFT4, EFF8, and ETF8 boards.
Table 7-1 Slots for the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Product
EGT2 (Note 1)
EFT8
(led out from
front panel)
(Note 1)
EFT8
(used with
interface
boards) (Note 1)
EFT4
EFF8/ETF8
OptiX OSN
3500 (80
Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 16,
1316
Slots 25,
1316
Not supported
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN
3500 (40
Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 16,
1316
Slots 13
Not supported
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN
2500
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 7, 1213
Slots 57,
19212
Slots 1, 3,
15, 17
OptiX OSN
2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Not
supported
OptiX OSN
1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
Not supported
Slots 23,
slots 1213,
slots 692
Not
supported
OptiX OSN
1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Slots 1213
Slots 13,
slots 1113,
slots 692
Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGT2 and the EFT8 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slots they are seated in.
Note 2: These slots are half-height slots.

7-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.1.1 Functionality
Function
Board
Basic function
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
Transparent
transmission of 2 GE
signals
Transparent
transmission of 8/16 FE
signals
Transparent
transmission of 4 FE
signals
The EFT8 can access 8

electrical Ethernet
signals itself.
Used with an
interface board
Used with the ETF8,

the EFT8 can access
16 electrical Ethernet
signals.
Used with the EFF8,

the EFT8 can access 8
optical Ethernet signals
and 8 electrical
Ethernet signals.
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
Ethernet optical
interface, supporting
auto-negotiation function
and compliant with
IEEE802.3z.
Interface
specifications
Service frame format
Adopt hot-swappable
SFP optical interface to
support a transmission
distance of 550 m for
multimode fiber and 10
km for single-mode fiber
(or use 40 km and 70 km
optical modules
according to the actual
condition).
Used with the ETF8,

the EFT8 supports
10Base-T/100Base-TX.
Used with EFF8 to
support 100Base-FX,
compliant with
IEEE802.3u.
Support
10Base-T/100Base-TX,
and comply with
IEEE802.3u.
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, supporting 64-byte9600-byte frames and 9600-byte

Jumbo frame.
1.25 Gbit/s;
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of
VCTRUNKs
Access up to 24 VC-3s
or 126 VC-12s + 18
VC-3s or 63 VC-12s +
21 VC-3s
16
High level data link control (HDLC)

Encapsulation format
Link access procedure-SDH (LAPS)

Generic Framing Procedure-Frame Mapped (GFP-F)

7-3
622 Mbit/s
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board

EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-4, VC-3-Xv,

and VC-4-Xv
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv

(X 63) and VC-3-Xv (X
3)
VC-3, VC-12, VC-12-Xv

(X 63) and VC-3-Xv (X
3)
CAR
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
Flow control
GE port based IEEE

802.3X complaint flow
control
FE port based IEEE

control
FE port based IEEE

control
Link capacity
adjustment scheme
(LCAS)
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and

bandwidth protection.
Link stat pass

through (LPT)
Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
Testing frame
Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Support port level Ethernet performance monitoring.
Alarm and
performance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment

management and maintenance.
Function
7.1.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4 is the same, except that GE signal
or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-1 takes a GE signal as an example to
introduce the working principle of the EGT2.

7-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Backplane
1000 M
Interface
module
Service
processing
module
Encapsulation
module
Mapping
module
Crossconnect
unit
1000 M
Control and
communication
module
SCC unit
+3.3 V (standby)
+1.5 V
+1.8 V
+2.5 V
+3.3 V
Power
module
-48 V
Figure 7-1 Functional block diagram of the EGT2
The interface module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from external Ethernet

equipment (such as LAN switch and router) and performs decoding and serial/parallel
conversion to the signals. Then it sends signals to the service processing module for
frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping, cyclic redundancy code (CRC)
termination and Ethernet performance statistics. At the encapsulation module, HDLC,
LAPS or GFP-F encapsulation is done to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services
are mapped into VC-3 or VC-4 at the mapping module and then sent to the
cross-connect unit.
Demap the VC-3 or VC-4 signals from the cross-connect unit and send them to the
encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module determines
the route according to the level of the equipment; it also provides frame delimitation,
adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics. Finally, the
interface module performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding to the signals and
then sends them out from the Ethernet interface.
3. Auxiliary Units
Control and communication module
Implement communication, control and service configuration functions.
Power module
Provide DC power supply of various voltages for the board.
7.1.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 is shown in Figure 7-2.

7-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

EGT2
EFT8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ETF8
EFF8
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
LINK ACT
OUT1
IN1
FE1
FE2
FE3
FE1
IN2
FE2
OUT2
FE4
FE5
FE3
FE6
FE4
FE7
FE5
FE6
FE8
EFT4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
FE2
FE7
FE1
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
FE3
FE8
FE4
EGT2
EGT2
EFT8
EFT8
ETF8
EFF8
ETF8
EFF8
EFT4
Figure 7-2 Front panel of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGT2, EFT8 and EFT4.

Except the above common indicators, the EGT2 has other four indicators to show port
connection status. Table 7-2 shows the indicators description.

7-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-2 Indicators of the EGT2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection
indicatorLINK1
(green)
On
GE port 1 connects with remote equipment

successfully
Off
GE port 1 fails to connects with remote equipment
Flashing
GE port 1 and remote equipment are

receiving/sending data
Off
GE port 1 and remote equipment do not

receive/send data
On

successfully
Off
GE port 2 fails to connects with remote equipment
Flashing

receiving/sending data
Off

receive/send data
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT1
(orange)
Connection
indicatorLINK2
(green)
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT2
(orange)
Each Ethernet port of the EFT8, EFT4 and ETF8 has LINK and ACT indicators
near the port. The meanings of the indicators are the same as those in Table 7-2.
Each Ethernet port on the front panel of the EFF8 has LINK and ACT indicators.
Table 7-3 shows the indicator description.
Table 7-3 Indicators of the EFF8
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection indicatorLINK
(green)
On
Fiber-port connection succeeded.
Off
Fiber-port connection failed
Flashing
Receiving/Sending data
Off
No data received/sent
Data receiving/sending
indicatorACT (orange)
2. Interfaces
Table 7-4 shows the interface description of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8.

Table 7-4 Interfaces of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Board
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
EFF8
ETF8
Number of
interfaces
2 pairs
Access capacity
2 x GE
8 x FE
4 x FE
Interface
board
Interface
board
Connector
LC
RJ-45
RJ-45
LC
RJ-45
Item

7-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Item

Board
Swappable optical
module
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
EFF8
ETF8
Supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported

The parameters required by the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 are as follows:
J1
It is the path trace byte. This byte is used to transmit repetitively a Path Access Point
Identifier so that a path receiving terminal can verify its continued connection to the
intended transmitter. When J1 mismatch is detected at the receive end, the
corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_TIM alarm. The J1 byte is set to
HuaWei SBS by default.
C2
It is the signal label byte, indicating the multiplexing structure of VC-4 frame and the
payload property. It is required that the C2 bytes transmitted match those received. If
mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm
and insert all 1s into the C4.
Ethernet interface setting
Table 7-5 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface of the
EGT2/EFT8/EFT4.
Table 7-5 Parameters for the Ethernet interface of EGT2/EFT8/EFT4
Parameter
Description
Working mode
The EGT2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex.

The EFT8/EFT4 can be set to auto-negotiation or 10/100 Mbit/s
half-duplex or 10/100 Mbit/s full-duplex.
Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment should work
under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may be
lost or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely
interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
LCAS enable
Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet
length
Set this item for the external port, 1522 bytes by default.
Mapping protocol
Available protocols: HDLC, LAPS and GFP-F. It is preferable to

select the default GFP-F.

The EGT2 and EFT8 have N1 version only. The EGT2 and EFT8 are applicable to the
OptiX the OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The EFT4, seated in the half-height slot, has R1 version only. The EFT4 is applicable
to the OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The EFF8 and ETF8 interface boards have N1 version only. The EFF8 and ETF8 are
7-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, or OptiX OSN1500 (B).

The technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 are shown in Table
7-6.
Table 7-6 Technical parameters of the EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8
Parameter
Description
EGT2
EFT8
EFT4
ETF8/EFF8
Bit rate
1000 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
10/100 Mbit/s
Processing
capacity
2 x GE
16 x FE
4 x FE
8 x FE E/O
interface
board
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)
Connector
LC (SFP)
RJ-45
RJ-45
Interface
specifications
IEEE 802.3z
compliant
IEEE 802.3u
compliant
IEEE 802.3u
compliant
IEEE 802.3u
compliant
Dimensions
(mm)
262.05 (H) x
220 (D) x 25.4
(W)
262.05 (H) x
220 (D) x 25.4
(W)
111.8 (H) x 220

(D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x
110 (D) x 22
(W)
Weight (kg)
0.9
1.01
0.53
Power
consumption
(W)
23
26
14
Optical module
type
1000Bas
e-SX
1000Bas
e-LX
1000Bas
e-ZX
1000Bas
e-ZX
100BaseFX
100Ba
se-FX
Central
wavelength
(nm)
850
1310
127013
55
148015
80
127013
80
12611
360
Transmission
distance (km)
00.55
010
40
70
15
Mean launched
power (dBm)
9.5 to 4
11.5 to
3
2 to 5
23
19 to
14
15 to
8
Optical receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
17
19
4 to 2
22
30
32
Long-term
operating
condition
Humidity: 10%90%

7-9
E: RJ-45
O: LC
EFT8: 0.37
EFF8: 0.44
EFT8: 2
EFF8: 6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter

Description
EGT2
EFT8
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
EFT4
ETF8/EFF8
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%
Note: The EFT8 has no optical interface. The 100 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EFF8.
The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGT2.

7-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETF8/EFF8/ETS8
The EGS2 is a 2-port Gigabit Ethernet processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS4 is a 4-port FE processing board with L2 switching.
The EFS0 is a FE processing board with L2 switching.
The ETF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet electrical interface board.
The EFF8 is an 8-port 10/100M Ethernet optical interface board.
The ETS8 is an 8-port 10/100M BaseT Ethernet interface switching board.
The Ethernet switching boards are responsible for transparent transmission,

convergence and Layer 2 switching of GE/FE services.
Table 7-7 shows the slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8 in OptiX OSN
products.
Table 7-7 Slots for the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/EFF8/ETF8/ETS8
OptiX OSN
product
EGS2
(Note 1)
EFS4
(Note 1)
EFS0
(Note 1)
ETS8
EFF8/ETF8
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 25,
1316
Slots 21, 33
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 18,
1116
Slots 25,
1316
Slots 21, 33
Slots 19, 21,

23, 25, 29,
31, 33, 35
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 67,
1213
Slots 1, 3,
15, 17
Slots 1, 3,
15, 17
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
Not
supported
Not
supported
Not
supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
Slots 1213
Slots 14
Slots 14, 16
Note 1: The EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 supports bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.

7-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.2.1 Functionality
EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Basic function
Access and
process 4 FE
signals
Process 8 FE signals
Access and process 2

GE signals
Used with an
interface board
Used with ETF8, the

EFS0 can access 8
electrical FE signals;
Function
Board
Used with EFF8, the

EFS0 can access 8
optical FE signals;
Used with ETS8, the
EFS0 can provide
TPS protection for 8
electrical FE signals
Interface
specifications
10Base-T/100Bas
e-TX, compliant
with IEEE802.3u
Used with ETF8, the

EFS0 supports
10Base-T/100Base-T
X;
Used with EFF8 to
support 100Base-FX;
compliant with
IEEE802.3u
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
Ethernet optical
interface; supporting
auto-negotiation
function and compliant
with IEEE802.3z;
Adopt hot-swappable
SFP optical interface to
support a transmission
distance of 550 m for
multimode fiber and 10
km for single-mode fiber
(or use 40 km and 70 km
optical modules
condition).
Service frame
format
Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3, IEEE 802.1qTAG, supporting 64Byte9600Byte

frame, supporting 9600Byte Jumbo frame.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
622 Mbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
2.5 Gbit/s
Number of
VCTRUNKs
24
24
48
Mapping mode
VC-12, VC-3,
VC-4, VC-12-Xv,
VC-3-Xv
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4,

VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
VC-12, VC-3, VC-4,

VC-12-Xv, VC-3-Xv
Encapsulation
format
GFP-F
GFP-F
GFP-F
Ethernet Private
Line (EPL)
Support Port based transparent transmission and Port+VLAN based

virtual private line service.

7-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
Ethernet Virtual
Private Line (EVPL)
EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Support EVPL, with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE 802.3,
IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol Label Switch (MPLS) MartiniOE.
Support port or port+ VLAN based MPLS encapsulation and forward.
Ethernet Private
LAN (EPLAN)
Support Layer 2 based convergence and point-to-multipoint

convergence;
Support Layer 2 switching, including local switching and SDH-side
switching;
Support self-learning of source medium access control (MAC) address.
The MAC address table is 16 k and the MAC address aging time can be
set and queried through T2000; support configuration of static MAC
route;
Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation;
Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum number of
VBs is 32 and that of logic ports is 16 for each VB
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
Support EVPLAN, in MPLS Martini OE, MPLS MartiniOP and stack

VLAN frame encapsulation format.
MPLS
Supported
Supported
Supported
Virtual local area

network (VLAN)
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
VLAN convergence
4000 VLANs
4000 VLANs
4000 VLANs
Rapid spanning tree

protocol (RSTP)
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP, compliant

with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP Snooping
Supported
CAR
Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64 kbit/s.
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
Traffic classification
Support port based or port+VLAN based traffic classification.
LCAS (Note 1)
ITU-T G.7042, achieving dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease and

bandwidth protection
LPT
Support LPT, which can be enabled or disabled.
Flow control
Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control
Testing frame
Support receiving and transmitting Ethernet testing frame.
Loopback
Support inloop at Ethernet port (PHY layer or MAC layer).
Supported
Supported
Support inloop and outloop at VC3 level.

Ethernet
performance
monitoring

7-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
Alarm and
performance event
EFS4
EFS0
EGS2 (Note 1)
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient

equipment management and maintenance.
Note 1: N1EGS2 does not support LCAS function, N2EGS2 supports LCAS function.
7.2.2 Principle
The working principle of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 is the same, except that GE
signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-3 shows the functional block
diagram of the EGS2 (one GE signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
1000 M
1000 M
Interface
processing
module
Service
processing
module
Cross-connect unit
Encapsulation module
Mapping
module
Cross-connect unit
Control and
communication
module
SCC
+3.3 V Standby
+5 V
+2.7 V
+3.3 V
Power
module
-48 V
Figure 7-3 Functional block diagram of the EGS2
The interface processing module accesses 1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX signals from

external Ethernet equipments (such as Ethernet switch and router) and performs
decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signals. Then, the signals are sent to
the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
cyclic redundancy code (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In
addition, traffic classification is performed according to the service type and
configuration requirement (message formats MPLS, Layer 2 MPLS VPN and
Ethernet/VLAN are supported), and Tunnel and VC double labels are added
according to the service for mapping and transfer. At the encapsulation module, the
GFP-F encapsulation is performed to the Ethernet frame. After that, the services are
mapped into VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 at the mapping module and then sent to the
cross-connect unit.
The VC-4, VC-3 or VC-12 signals from the cross-connect unit are demapped and sent
7-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

to the encapsulation module for decapsulation. The service processing module

determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs traffic
classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also, frame
delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance statistics
are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signals are sent out from
the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at interface
processing module.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 is shown in Figure 7-4.
EGS2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
EFS0
EFS4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
ETS8
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
IN1
FE1
FE1
IN2
FE2
OUT2
FE3
FE2
FE4
FE5
FE3
FE6
FE7
EGS2
EGS2
EFS0
EFS4
EFS0
EFS4
FE8
FE4
ETS8
ETS8
Figure 7-4 Front panel of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8

7-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.

Except the above common indicators, the EGS2 has other four indicators to show port
connection. Table 7-8 shows the description of the indicators on the EGS2.
Table 7-8 Indicators of the EGS2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection
indicatorLINK1
(green)
On

successfully.
Off
GE port 1 fails to connect with remote equipment.
Flashing

receiving/sending data.
Off

receive/send data.
On

successfully.
Off
Flashing

Off

receive/send data.
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT1
(orange)
Connection
indicatorLINK2
(green)
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT2
(orange)
Each Ethernet port of the EFS4, EFS0 and ETS8 has LINK and ACT indicators.
The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGS2.
For indicator description of the interface board, see section 7.1.3.
2. Interfaces
Table 7-9 shows the interface description of EGS2, EFS4, EFS0, and ETS8.
Table 7-9 Interfaces of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
EGS2
EFS4
EFS0
ETS8
Number of
interfaces
2 pairs
4 pairs
8 pairs
Processing
capacity
2 x GE
4 x FE
8 x FE
Ethernet
interface
switching board
Connector
LC
RJ-45
None
RJ-45
Item
Board

7-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Item

Board
Swappable optical
module
EGS2
EFS4
EFS0
ETS8
Supported
Not supported
Not
supported
Not supported

The EFS0 is used with the ETS8 and TSB8 to implement 1:1 TPS protection for FE
electrical services. Table 7-10 shows the TPS protection of the EFS0.
Table 7-10 TPS protection of the EFS0
OptiX OSN product
TPS protection
Configuration
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Support two
groups of 1:1 TPS.
The board in slot 2 protects the board in

slot 3.
slot 15.
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
OptiX OSN 2500
Support one group

of 1:1 TPS.

slot 12.
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Support one group

of 1:1 TPS.

slot 13.
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 3500
is shown in Figure 7-5.

7-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
5
S
L
O
T
6
S
L
O
T
7
S
L
O
T
8
S
L
O
T
10
FAN
S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L
O OOOOO OO
T T T T T T T T
11 1213141516 1718
SCC
Protection 2
Working 2
Working 1
Protection 1
S
L
O
T
9
XCS
S
L
O
T
4
XCS
S
L
O
T
3
PIU
S
L
O
T
2
S
L
O
T
37
AUX
PIU
S
L
O
T
1
FAN
TSB8
TSB8
FAN
S S S SS SS S
L L L LL LL L
O O O OO OO O
T T T TT TT T
2930313233343536
ETS8
S S
L
L
O O
T T
27 28
ETS8
S S S S SS S S
L L L L LL L L
O O O O OO O O
T T T T TT T T
1920212223242526
Fiber routing
Figure 7-5 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 3500
In Figure 7-5, slot 2 protects slot 3, and slot 16 protects slot 15.
The slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 is shown in Table 7-11.
Table 7-11 Slot assignment of the EFS0, ETS8 and TSB8 in the OptiX OSN 3500
Board
Protection group 1
Protection group 2
EFS0 (protect board)
Slot 2
Slot 16
EFS0 (working board)
Slot 3
Slot 15
TSB8
Slot 19
Slot 35
ETS8
Slot 21
Slot 33
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 2500

7-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

S
L
O
T
13
S
L
O
T
14
S
L
O
T
15
SAP
ETS8
S
L
O
T
16
S
L
O
T
17
S
L
O
T
18
TSB8
S
L
O
T
12
EFS0(P)
S
L
O
T
11
CXL16
CXL16
S S S S S S S S S S
L L L L L L L L L L
O O O O O O O O O O
T T T T T T T T T T
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
EFS0(W)
Fiber routing
PIU
(Slot 22)
FAN
(Slot 24)
FAN
(Slot 25)
PIU
(Slot 23)
Figure 7-6 Board configuration upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 13 protects slot 12. The ETS8 seated in slot 15 is used with the working EFS0
and the TSB8 seated in slot 17 is used with the protect EFS0.
3. Board Configuration of the OptiX OSN 1500 B
The slot configuration of the working board and protect board in the OptiX OSN 1500B
Slot 14
TSB8
Slot 15
Slot 16
ETS8
Slot 17
Slot 20
FAN
Slot 18
PIU
Slot 19
PIU
Slot 1
Slot 11
Slot 6
Slot 2
Slot 12
EFS0 (P)
Slot 7
Slot 3
Slot 13
EFS0 (W)
Slot 8
Slot 4
CXL16/4/1
Slot 9
EOW
Slot 5
CXL16/4/1
Slot 10
AUX
Figure 7-7 Board distribution upon 1:1 TPS protection of the OSN 1500
Slot 12 protects slot 13. The ETS8 seated in slot 16 is used with the working EFS0
and the TSB8 seated in slot 14 is used with the protect EFS0.

The major parameters required by the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are as follows:
J1
C2

7-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-12 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2,
EFS4 and EFS0.
Table 7-12 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0
Parameter
Description
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG
flags are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets
with the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag
flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to
the packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards
those with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets
without the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID
VLAN ID of the port.
Working mode
The EGS2 can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s full-duplex.

The EFS4 and EFS0 can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s
full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment
should work under the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the
packet may be lost and the bit rate may decrease, or the service may
be completely interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type
There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal
port of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of
the service provider. Port type is needed when configuring EVPL and
EVPLAN services.
LCAS enable
Enable LCAS or not.
Maximum packet
length
Mapping protocol
It is preferable to select the default GFP-F mapping protocol.

The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 have two versions: N1 and N2. N1 is the basic one. In
this version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2 version. The
functions and parameters of N2 version are listed in this section. Table 7-13 shows the
version description of the EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0.

7-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-13 N1 and N2 EGS2/EFS4/EFS0 boards
Item
Description
Similarity
The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.
In N1 version, the uplink bandwidth at the SDH side is half that in N2
version.
Difference
The N1EFSO and the N2EFSO boards are the same in hardware and are
different in software.
The hardware of the N1EGS2 is different from that of the N2EGS2.
The N1EGS2 board does not support LCAS, LPT, RSTP, IGMP
Snooping, MPLS (including QinQ), link aggregation (802.3ad), and port
rate query function.
NM support
The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2.

V100R001 products only support N1 Ethernet processing boards. If N2
boards are inserted, the T2000 takes the board as N1 version by default
and uses the boards as N1 boards.
Product
support
V100R002 products support N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards.

When the T2000 uploads board configuration, all Ethernet processing
boards (N1 or N2) are displayed as N1 boards by default. At this time, the
boards are used as N1 boards. If you need to use N2 boards, select and
configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to
N2 software.
configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to
N2 software.
For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to
N2.
Replacement
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and

V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards
(displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2
boards on the T2000).
When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to
N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During
the upgrade, services will be interrupted.
The EGS2, EFS4 and EFS0 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).
The ETS8 has only one version. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500, and OptiX OSN1500B.

The technical parameters of the EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8 are shown in Table 7-14.

7-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-14 Technical parameters of EGS2/EFS4/EFS0/ETS8
Parameter
Description
EGS2
EFS4
Bit rate
1000 Mbit/s
100 Mbit/s
Access
capacity
2 x GE
Processing
capacity
EFS0
ETS8
4 x FE
8 x FE Ethernet
interface
switching board
2 x GE
4 x FE
8 x FE
Line code
pattern
NRZ
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3 (100 Mbit/s)
Connector
LC (SFP)
RJ-45
None
RJ-45
Interface
impedance
100 ohm
100 ohm
Interface
specifications
IEEE 802.3z
compliant
IEEE 802.3u compliant
Optical
module type
1000Base-SX
1000Base-LX
1000Base-ZX
1000Base-ZX
Central
wavelength
(nm)
850
1310
12701355
14801580
Transmission
distance (km)
00.55
010
40
70
Mean
launched
power (dBm)
9.5 to 4
11.5 to 3
2 to 5
23
Receiver
sensitivity
(dBm)
17
19
4 to 2
22
Dimensions
(mm)
262.05 (H) x 220

(D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220

(D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220

(D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 110

(D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.04
0.98
0.98
0.37
Power
consumption
(W)
40/43.2
30
35
2.5
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%

7-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter

Description
EGS2
EFS4
Environment
for storage
Environment
for
transportation
EFS0
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%
Note: The 1000 Mbit/s optical interface in this table is that of the EGS2.

7-23
ETS8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.3 EMR0/EGR2
The EMR0 is a 12 FE + 1 GE Ethernet board with RPR function.
The EGR2 is a 2-port GE processing board with RPR function.
The EMR0 and EGR2 are responsible for accessing and processing Ethernet signals,
and constructing resilient packet ring (RPR).
Table 7-15 shows the slots for the EMR0 and EGR2 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-15 Slots for the EMR0 and EGR2
Product
EMR0 (led out from

front panel)
EMR0 (used with

interface board)
EGR2
OptiX OSN 3500

(80 Gbit/s)
Slots 16, 1316
Slots 23, 1316
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 3500

(40 Gbit/s)
Slots 16, 1316
Slots 23, 1316
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 67, 1213
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500

REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Not supported
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1213
Slots 1113
Note: The EMR0 and EGR2 support bandwidth auto-sensing, adjusting uplink bandwidth automatically
according to the capacity of the slot they are seated in.
Note:
For the OptiX OSN 3500, if SDH cross-connect capacity is 40 Gbit/s, the maximum
uplink bandwidth of slots 68 and slots 1113 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 622
Mbit/s. If the SDH cross-connect capacity is 80 Gbit/s, the maximum uplink bandwidth
of slots 58 and slots 1114 is 2.5 Gbit/s and that of other slots is 1.25 Gbit/s.
For the OptiX OSN 2500, the maximum uplink bandwidth of slots 56 is 622 Mbit/s,
that of slots 7, 8, 11, 12 is 2.5 Gbit/s, and that of slot 13 is 1.25 Gbit/s.
7.3.1 Functionality
Function
Board
Basic function
EMR0
EGR2
Process 12 FE signals and 1 GE

signals.
Access and process 2 GE

signals.
Support RPR.
Support RPR.

7-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
Used with interface

board
EMR0
EGR2
Provide 4 FE ports and 1 GE port.
Used with the ETF8, the EMR0 can

access 12 electrical FE signals.
Used with the EFF8, the EMR0 can
access 8 optical FE signals.
Interface
specifications
Used with the ETF8, the EMR0

supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX
over a transmission distance of up to
100 m.
Used with the EFF8, the EMR0
supports 100Base-FX.
Comply with IEEE802.3u.
1000BASE-SX/LX/ZX
Ethernet optical interface,
supporting
auto-negotiation and
compliant with
IEEE802.3z.
Adopt hot-swappable SFP
optical interface to support
a transmission distance of
550 m for multimode fiber
and 10 km for single-mode
fiber (or use 40 km and 70
km optical modules
condition).
Service frame
format
MPLS, supporting 64Byte9600Byte frame and 9600Byte Jumbo

frame
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
2.5 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC-3, VC-3-2v, VC-4, VC-4-Xv (X8)
Encapsulation
format
GFP-F: compliant with ITU-T G.7041
Ethernet private line

(EPL)
Support port-base transparent transmission and port+VLAN virtual

private line service.
Ethernet virtual
private line (EVPL)
Support EVPL with service frame format being Ethernet II, IEEE
802.3, IEEE 802.1q TAG or Multi-protocol label switch (MPLS)
Martini frame.
2.5 Gbit/s
LAPS: compliant with ITU-T X.86
Support port-based or port+VLAN-based MPLS encapsulation and

forward;
Support five types of label switch path (LSP): ingress LSP, egress
LSP, transit LSP, RPR ingress LSP, and RPR transit LSP.
Support 2000 LSPs.

7-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
Ethernet virtual
private LAN
(EVPLAN)
EMR0
EGR2
Support EVPLAN service in stack VLAN or Martini frame

encapsulation format.
Support self-learning of MAC address. The MAC address table
has 64,000 entries k and the MAC address aging time can be set
and queried through T2000.
Support configuration of up to 4000 static MAC routes.
Support virtual bridge (VB)+VLAN based data isolation.
Support creating, deleting and querying a VB. The maximum
number of VBs is 16 and that of logic ports is 32 for each VB.
MPLS
Support MPLS frame format to construct EVPL and EVPLAN

services.
Support 4000 MPLS labels.
Virtual local area

network (VLAN)
IEEE 802.1q/p
IEEE 802.1q/p
VLAN convergence
Support 4000 VLANs.
Support 4000 VLANs.
VLAN switching
Support VLAN tag switching.
Support VLAN tag

switching.
Port aggregation
Support the aggregation of up to 12

FE ports.
RPR feature
Supported and compliant with IEEE

802.17.
Supported and compliant

with IEEE 802.17.
RPR function
Support up to 255 nodes and destination node stripping.

Support weighted fair algorithm.
Support fiver priority levels: A0, A1, B_EIR, B_CIR and C.
Provide auto discovery of topology to show the network status in
real time.
Support protection modes of steering, wrapping and wrapping +
steering. The signal fail time is less than 50ms.
Support configuring service route on RPRs manually.
Support self-learning function, that is, learning the
correspondence between MAC address and node number.
Rapid spanning tree

protocol (RSTP)
Support broadcast packet suppression function and RSTP,

compliant with IEEE 802.1w.
IGMP snooping
Supported
CAR
Port based or port+VLAN based, with the granularity being 64

kbit/s, ranging from 64 kbit/s to 100 Mbit/s.
2000 CARs are supported.
Traffic classification
Support port-based ,port+VLAN and port + VLAN + PRI based

traffic classification.

7-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Board
Function
EMR0
EGR2
LCAS
ITU-T G.7042, supporting dynamic bandwidth increase/decrease

and bandwidth protection.
Flow control
Port based IEEE 802.3X compliant flow control.
Echo test frame
Support the Echo function in RPR OAM which tests the link status.
Loopback
Support inloop at Ethernet port (at PHY layer or MAC layer).

Support inloop and outloop at VC-3 level.
Ethernet
performance
monitoring
Alarm and
performance event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient

equipment management and maintenance.
7.3.2 Principle
The working principle of the EMR0 is the same as that of the EGR2, except that GE
signal or FE signal is processed respectively. Figure 7-8 shows the functional block
diagram (one 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
10/100
Mbit/s
10/100
Mbit/s
Interface
module
Ethernet
processing
module
RPR
processing
module
Encapsulation
and
mapping
module
Communication
and control
module
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC
unit
+3.3 V (standby)
+5 V
+2.7 V
+3.3 V
Power
module
-48 V
Figure 7-8 Functional block diagram of the EMR0
The interface processing module accesses a 10/100Base-TX/100Base-FX signal

from external Ethernet equipment (such as the Ethernet switch and router) and
performs decoding and serial/parallel conversion to the signal. Then, the signal is sent
to the service processing module for frame delimitation, preamble field code stripping,
cyclic redundancy check (CRC) termination and Ethernet performance statistics. In
7-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

addition, traffic classification, Layer 2 switching, convergence, MPLS frame

processing, RPR inner ring and outer ring mapping are performed according to
service type and configuration requirement. The RPR processing module performs
IEEE 802.17 based ring network control function. In the encapsulation module, LAPS
or GFP-F encapsulation of Ethernet frame is completed. Finally, the signal is mapped
into VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv at the mapping module and then sent to the cross-connect
unit.
The VC-3-Xv or VC-4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is demapped and sent to
the encapsulation module for decapsulation. In the RPR processing module, IEEE
802.17 based ring network control function is performed. The service processing
module determines the route according to the level of the equipment, and performs
traffic classification according to the service type and configuration requirement. Also,
frame delimitation, adding preamble field code, CRC calculation and performance
statistics are performed by the service processing module. Finally, the signal is sent
out from the Ethernet interface after parallel/serial conversion and encoding at the
interface processing module.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.3.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-9 shows the front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2.

7-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

EMR0
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK
ACT
EGR2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
LINK1
ACT1
LINK2
ACT2
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1
OUT1
IN1
IN1
FE1
OUT2
IN2
FE2
FE3
FE4
EMR0
EGR2
EMR0
EGR2
Figure 7-9 Front panel of the EMR0 and EGR2
1. Indicators
The EGR2 has six board indicators and the EMR0 has eight board indicators as
follows:
Connection indicator (LINK1/2) green
Data receiving/sending indicator (ACT1/2) orange

The four indicators of the EGR2 indicating port connection are described in Table 7-16.
The LINK and ACT indicators on the EMR0 indicating GE optical interface connection
status, as described in Table 7-16.

7-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 7-16 Indicators of the EGR2
Indicator
Status
Description
Connection
indicatorLINK1
(green)
On

successfully.
Off
Flashing

Off

receive/send data.
On

successfully.
Off
Flashing

Off

receive/send data.
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT1
(orange)
Connection
indicatorLINK2
(green)
Data
receiving/sending
indicatorACT2
(orange)
Each FE port on the front panel of the EMR0 also has LINK and ACT indicators.
The meanings of the indicators are the same as those of the EGR2.
2. Interfaces
Table 7-17 shows the interface description of the EMR0 and EGR2.
Table 7-17 Interfaces of EMR0 and EGR2
Board
Item
Number of interfaces
EMR0
EGR2
1 pair of GE optical
interfaces + 4 FE electrical
interfaces
2 pairs of GE optical
interfaces
GE: LC (SFP)
Connector
FE: R-J45
Swappable optical
module
Supported
GE: LC (SFP)
Supported

The parameters required by the EMR0 and EGR2 are as follows:
J1
7-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

C2
Table 7-18 lists the major parameters to be set for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0
and EGR2.
Table 7-18 Parameters for the Ethernet interface on the EMR0 and EGR2
Parameter
Description
Tag flag
Tag flag is used to identify the type of packets. Three types of TAG flags
are available: tag aware, access, and hybrid.
(1) When the port is set to be tag aware, the port transmits packets with
the Tag flag transparently and discards those without the Tag flag.
(2) When the port is set to be access, the port attaches a Tag flag to the
packets without Tag flag according to its VLAN ID and discards those
with the Tag flag.
(3) When the port is set to be hybrid, the port can process packets
regardless of the Tag flag, and attach a Tag flag to the packets without
the Tag flag according to its VLAN ID.
VLAN ID
Set VLAN ID for external port only.
Working
mode
The GE interface can be set to auto-negotiation or 1000 Mbit/s

full-duplex. The FE interface can be set to auto-negotiation, 10 Mbit/s
half-duplex, 10 Mbit/s full duplex, 100 Mbit/s half duplex or 100 Mbit/s
full-duplex. The Ethernet interfaces of the interconnected equipment
should work in the same fixed working mode. Otherwise, the packet may
be lost, or the bit rate may decrease, or the service may be completely
interrupted upon large volume of traffic.
Port type
There are two types: P and PE. Provider edge (PE) is the marginal port
of the service provider. Provider (P) is the core network port of the
service provider. Set the external port to PE and internal port to P.
Encapsulation
format
Multiple encapsulation formats are available: MartinioE, CCCoE, stack

VLAN, and MartinioP. This attribute takes effective for a P port. MartinioE
is applicable for point-to-multipoint Ethernet connection, MartinioP for
point-to-point Ethernet connection and stack VLAN for EVPLAN service.
Enable LCAS
Enable LCAS or not
Maximum
packet length
Mapping
protocol
LAPS and GFP-F are available. GFP-F is recommended.

7-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The EMR0 and EGR2 boards have N1 version and N2 version. N1 version is the basic
version. N2 version is the enhanced version, having some new functions compared
with N1 version. The functions and parameters listed in this section are applicable to
the boards of N2 version. Table 7-19 gives the version description of the two versions.
Table 7-19 Version description of the EMR0 and the EGR2
Item
Description
Similarity
The two versions are similar in the working principle and basic function.
N2 version provides some new functions besides all functions of N1
version.
Difference
N1 version
N2 version
Support the aggregation of up to 12 FE

ports.
Support the replacement of the VLAN

tag in Ethernet data.
Support EVPLAN services,

using stack VLAN
encapsulation format.
Support EVPLAN services, using MPLS

Martini encapsulation format.
Support the MAC address

with 16,000 entries.
Support the MAC address with 64,000

entries.
Support the creating, deleting

and query of VB. There can
be 32 VBs and 16 logic ports
for each VB at most.
Support the creating, deleting and

query of VB. There can be 16 VBs and
32 logic ports for each VB at most.
Support configuring service routes on

RPR manually.
Support the Echo function in RPR OAM

which tests the link status.
NM support
The T2000 distinguish the boards of N1 version and that of N2 version

directly.
Product
support
The V100R001 product only supports the RPR board of N1 version.

The V100R002 product supports the RPR board of N1 or N2 version.
The V100R003 product supports the Ethernet board of N1 or N2 version.
Replacement
Boards of N1 version can only be used as boards of N1 version. To the

V100R002 or V100R003 product, boards of N2 version can replace the
ones of N1 version.
The EMR0 and the EGR2 are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500,
and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

7-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Table 7-20 shows the technical parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2. For the
parameters of GE and FE optical interface, refer to Table 7-14.
Table 7-20 Technical Parameters of the EMR0 and EGR2
Board
Parameter
Bit rate
EMR0
EGR2
10/100 Mbit/s, 1000 Mbit/s
1000 Mbit/s
4 x 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s and 1 x

1000 Mbit/s;
Access capacity

1000 Mbit/s when used with
ETF8 or EFF8
2 x 1000 Mbit/s
Processing capacity

1000 Mbit/s
2 x 1000 Mbit/s
Line code pattern
Manchester (10 Mbit/s) or MLT-3

(100 Mbit/s), NRZ
NRZ
Connector
RJ-45, LC (SFP)
LC (SFP)
Interface impedance
100 ohm
Interface specifications
FE interface comply with

IEEE802.3u and GE interface
comply with IEEE802.3z
IEEE802.3z compliant
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4

(W)
Weight (kg)
1.20
1.10
Power consumption
(W)
50
54
Long-term operating
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 10%90%
condition
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 5%95%
Environment for
storage
Temperature: 40C to
70C
Environment for
transportation
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

7-33
Humidity: 10%100%
Temperature: 40C to
70C
Humidity: 10%100%
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.4 ADL4/ADQ1
The ADL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board. The ADQ1 is a 4 x STM-1
ATM service processing board.
The ADL4 and ADQ1 are responsible for accessing and processing ATM service.
Table 7-21 shows the slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1 in OptiX OSN products.
Table 7-21 Slots for the ADL4 and ADQ1
Product
ADL4
ADQ1
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 68, 1113
Slots 68, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 78, 1113
Slots 78, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
7.4.1 Functionality
ADL4
ADQ1
Basic function
Access and process 1 STM-4

ATM signal.
Access and process 4 STM-1

ATM signal.
Optical Interface
specifications
Support S-4.1, L-4.1.
Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
Connector
Hot-swappable LC (SFP)
E3 ATM interface
12 E3, inserted through

PD3/PL3
12 E3, inserted through

PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
ATM switching
capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv (X=14)
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or

UBR
ATM connection
8000
8000
Statistics multiplexing
Supported
Supported
Traffic type and QoS
IETF RFC2514
IETF RFC2514
ATM multicast
connection
Spacial multicast, logic multicast
Spacial multicast, logic

multicast
Function
Board

7-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


ADL4
ADQ1
ATM protection
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1
and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Unidirectional/bidirectional
1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring,
VC-Ring
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
Support 1+1 backup
OAM function (ITU-T

I.610)
AIS, RDI, LB (Loopback), CC

(continuity check)
AIS, RDI, LB, CC
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM

layer level for maintenance and fault localization.
Alarm and
performance
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for

maintenance and fault location.
Function
Board
7.4.2 Principle
Figure 7-10 shows the functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1 (one
STM-1/STM-4 signal is taken as an example).
Backplane
STM-1/STM-4
STM-1/STM-4
Physical
layer
processing
module
ATM
service
processing
module
Mapping
module
Control and
communication
module
Cross-connect
unit
Cross-connect
unit
SCC
+3.3 V(Standby)
+5 V
Power
module
+3.3 V
-48 V
Figure 7-10 Functional block diagram of the ADL4 and ADQ1
The STM-1/STM-4 signal accessed from the optical interface is sent to the physical
layer processing module after O/E conversion. After recovering data and clock, the
physical layer processing module performs SDH functions such as framing,
descrambling, overhead processing and pointer processing. In addition, it performs
the functions of ATM cell delimitation, descrambling and filtering. The ATM service
processing module establishes or disconnects connection for ATM service, and sends
ATM service to the mapping module after parameter configuration. The mapping
7-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

module maps ATM service to VC3, VC4 and VC4-Xv, and finally sends the service to
the cross-connect unit.
The VC-3 (E3), VC-4 or VC4-Xv signal from the cross-connect unit is sent to the
mapping module for demapping, and then to the ATM service processing module for
establishing or disconnecting connection as well as configuring parameters. The
uplink service is sent to the mapping module after being processed by the ATM
service processing module, and then sent to the cross-connect unit. The downlink
service is directly sent to the physical layer processing module for service rate
matching, insertion of idle cell, and cell descrambling, and then for SDH mapping,
overhead insertion, multiplexing and scrambling. Finally, the signal is sent out after
E/O conversion.
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
7.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1.l

7-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

ADL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
ADQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
ADL4
ADL4
ADQ1
ADQ1
Figure 7-11 Front panel of the ADL4 and ADQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the ADL4 and ADQ1.

2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The ADL4 has one pair and the ADQ1 has four pairs of
optical interfaces.
Optical interface type: LC
The ADL4 and ADQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.
7-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The ADL4 and ADQ1 support 1+1 board level protection.
The 1+1 board level protection for the ADL4 and the ADQ1 requires the working and
protection ADL4/ADQ1 boards. The working and protection boards do not require
seating in paired slots.

The parameters required by the ADL4 and ADQ1 are as follows:
J1
C2
ATM interface setting
Table 7-22 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1.
Table 7-22 Parameters for the ATM port of the ADL4/ADQ1
Parameter
Description
Port type
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type
Set according to the port.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR)
Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate

(SCR)
Set the parameter when the service type is rt-VBR or nrt-VBR.
Maximum cell burst

size
Cell delay variation

tolerance (CDVT)
Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or

UBR.

7-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The ADL4 and ADQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-23 shows the technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1.
Table 7-23 Technical parameters of the ADL4 and ADQ1
Parameter
Description
ADL4
ADQ1
Bit rate
622080 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Access capacity
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
ATM processing
capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
0.9
0.95
Power consumption
(W)
35
37
Optical module type
S-4.1
L-4.1
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1310
1310
Transmission
distance
215
1540
215
215
1540
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
3 to 2
15 to 8
15 to 8
5 to 0
(dBm)
28
28
23
28
34
Receiver overload
(dBm)
10
Long-term operating
condition
Short-term
operating condition
Environment for
storage
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%

7-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Description
ADL4
Environment for
transportation
ADQ1

Humidity: 10%100%
7.5 IDL4/IDQ1
The IDL4 is a 1 x STM-4 ATM service processing board with IMA. The IDQ1 is a 4 x
STM-1 ATM service processing board with IMA.
The IDL4 and IDQ1 can access and process 63E1 inverse multiplexing ATM (IMA)
services if used with the E1 service processing board.
Table 7-24 shows the slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-24 Slots for the IDL4 and IDQ1
Product
IDL4
IDQ1
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
7.5.1 Functionality
IDL4
IDQ1
Basic function
Access and process 1

STM-4 ATM signal.
Access and process 4 STM-1 ATM

signal.
Optical interface
specifications
Support S-4.1, L-4.1.
Support I-1, S-1.1, and L-1.1.
Connector
E3 ATM interface
12 x E3, inserted through

PD3/PL3
12 x E3, inserted through PD3/PL3
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
8 VC4, or 12 VC3 + 4 VC4
ATM switching
capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
1.2 Gbit/s
Mapping mode
VC3, VC4 or VC4-Xv

(X=14)
Function
Board

7-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
IMA feature
IDL4
IDQ1
Access and process IMA service when used with the E1 service
processing board.
Process 63 x E1 IMA services.
Support up to 32 IMA groups, 132 E1 for each group.
The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, or UBR
ATM connection
8000
Statistics
multiplexing
Supported
Traffic type and

QoS
IETF RFC2514
ATM multicast
connection
Spacial multicast, logic multicast
ATM protection
(ITU-T I.630)
Unidirectional/bidirectional 1+1 and 1:1, VP-Ring, VC-Ring
Board protection
Support 1+1 backup
OAM function
(ITU-T I.610)
AIS, RDI,loopback (LB),continuity check (CC)
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level and ATM layer
level for maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and
performance
event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance

and fault location.
7.5.2 Principle
The working principle of the IDL4 and IDQ1 is similar to that of the ADL4 and ADQ1,
except that IMA processing is added to the ATM processing module. For the workings
of the IDL4 and IDQ1, refer to Figure 7-10.
7.5.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-11 shows the front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1.l

7-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

IDL4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
IDQ1
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT1 IN1
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
OUT3 IN3
OUT4 IN4
IDL4
IDL4
IDQ1
IDQ1
Figure 7-12 Front panel of the IDL4 and IDQ1
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the IDL4 and IDQ1.

2. Interfaces
Number of optical interfaces: The IDL4 has one pair and the IDQ1 has four pairs of
optical interfaces.
The IDL4 and IDQ1 use swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

7-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The IDL4 and IDQ1 support 1+1 board level protection. The working and protection
IDL4/IDQ1 boards should seat in paired slots. Table 7-25 lists the paired slots for the
IDL4 and the IDQ1.
Table 7-25 Paired slots for the IDL4 and the IDQ1
Product
Paired slots
OptiX OSN 3500 (80Gbit/s)
(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16), (2&17)
OptiX OSN 3500 (40Gbit/s)
(8&11), (7&12), (6&13), (5&14), (4&15), (3&16)
OptiX OSN 2500
(8&11), (7&12)
OptiX OSN 1500A
(13&12)
OptiX OSN 1500B
(13&12)

The parameters required by the IDL4 and IDQ1 are as follows:
J1
C2
ATM interface setting
Table 7-26 lists the major parameters to be set for the ATM interface on the
IDL4/IDQ1.
Table 7-26 Parameters for the ATM interface on the IDL4/IDQ1
Parameter
Description
Port type
NNI and UNI. UNI is the default value.
Traffic type
Set according to the port.
Service type
CBR, rt-VBR, nrt-VBR, UBR
Peak cell rate (PCR)
Set the parameter for all types of services.
Sustainable cell rate

(SCR)
Maximum cell burst

size

7-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Description
Cell delay variation

tolerance (CDVT)
Set the parameter when the service type is CBR, rt-VBR or

UBR.

The IDL4 and IDQ1 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-27 shows the technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1.
Table 7-27 Technical parameters of the IDL4 and IDQ1
Parameter
Description
IDL4
IDQ1
Bit rate
622080 kbit/s
155520 kbit/s
Access capacity
1 x STM-4
4 x STM-1
ATM processing
capacity
1.2 Gbit/s
IMA processing
capacity
Process 63 E1s (provide 63 PHY addresses), and support 32 IMA

groups.
Number of E1s within an IMA group is configurable, which can be
132. Support configurable IMA frame length.
Support IMA1.1 protocol. The maximum multipath delay is 226ms.
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (nm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.01
1.01
Power
consumption (W)
36.6
36.6
Optical module
type
S-4.1
L-4.1
I-1
S-1.1
L-1.1
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1310
1310
Transmission
distance
215
1540
215
215
1540
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
3 to 2
15 to 8
15 to 8
5 to 0
(dBm)
28
28
23
28
34

7-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Description
IDL4
IDQ1
Receiver overload
(dBm)
Long-term
operating condition
Short-term
operating condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
10
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%
7.6 MST4
The MST4 is a 4 x multi-service transparent transmission processing board,
responsible for accessing and transmitting transparently fiber channel (FC), fiber
connection (FICON), enterprise systems connection (ESCON), and digital video
broadcast - asynchronous serial interface (DVB-ASI) services.
Table 7-28 shows the slots for the MST4.
Table 7-28 Slots for the MST4
Product
MST4
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
7.6.1 Functionality
Function
Board
Basic function
MST4
Provide four independent multi-service access interfaces and
support transparent transmission of 4 storage area network
(SAN)/video signals.

7-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Function

Board
MST4
Support FC50, FC100/FICON, FC200, ESCON, DVB-ASI signal.
The service types and rates are shown in Table 7-29.
Support four-port FC service (FC50, FC100/FICON and FC200),
with the total bandwidth not exceeding 2.5 Gbit/s.
Service type
Support transmission of FC service at full rate, that is, transmission

of one FC200 or two FC100, or four FC50 services.
Support four-port ESCON or DVB-ASI service.
Connector
Distance extension
function
The first and second interfaces support SDH side distance

extension function: FC100 supports 3000 km, and FC200 supports
1500 km.
The first and second interfaces support client side distance
extension function: FC100 supports 40 km, and FC200 supports 20
km.
Maximum uplink
bandwidth
The backplane supports the connection of four 622 Mbit/s buses to

the cross-connect unit. The total uplink bandwidth is 2.5 Gbit/s.
Encapsulation
format
Support GFP-T encapsulation format in compliance with ITU-T

G.7041.
Mapping mode
VC-4-Xc(X=1, 4, 8, 16)
Maintenance
Support inloop and outloop at optical interface level for

maintenance and fault localization
Alarm and
performance event
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for maintenance

and fault location.
Table 7-29 The service types and rates provided by the MST4
Service type
Bit rate
Remarks
FC50
531.25 Mbit/s
Storage area network (SAN)
FC100/FICON
1062.5 Mbit/s
SAN service
FC200
2125 Mbit/s
SAN service
ESCON
200 Mbit/s
SAN service
DVB-ASI
270 Mbit/s
Video service
7.6.2 Principle
Figure 7-13 shows the working principle of the MST4.

7-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Backplane
FC
ESCON
ATM
service
processing
module
Interface
module
DVB-ASI
FE
protocol
processin
g module
Mapping
module
Control and
communication
module
Cross-connect
unit
SCC
+3.3 V (Standby)
+5 V
+2.5 V
+3.3 V
Power
module
-48 V
Figure 7-13 The functional block diagram of the MST4
The interface processing module accesses the optical signal from external equipment
(such as Ethernet switch, router, SAN equipment, or multi-media equipment),
decodes the signal after O/E conversion and sends the signal to the encapsulation
module for GFP-T encapsulation. The encapsulated signal is sent to the mapping
module for mapping to VC-4-Xc or VC-4. And finally sent to the SDH cross-connect
unit.
If port 1 and port 2 need to implement distance extension function for FC100 and
FC200 services, the first and second signal from the interface processing module is
sent to the FC protocol processing module, then sent to the encapsulation module and
mapping module, and finally sent to the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment.
The VC-4-Xc signal from the cross-connect unit or DWDM equipment is demapped
and then sent to the encapsulation module for de-encapsulation. The FC service
needing distance extension is sent to the FC protocol processing module. Other
services are sent to the interface processing module and then sent out after E/O
conversion.
3. Auxiliary Units
It achieves control, communication and service configuration for the board.
Power module
Provide various voltages required by the boards.

7-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

7.6.3 Front Panel

Figure 7-14 shows the front panel of the MST4.
MST4
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1
IN1
OUT2
IN2
OUT3
IN3
OUT4
IN4
MST4
Figure 7-14 The front panel of the MST4
1. Indicator
There are four indicators on the MST4.

2. Interface
Number of optical interfaces: The MSTE has four pairs of optical interfaces.
7-48
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The MST4 uses swappable optical module for convenient maintenance.

Parameters to be configured for the MST4:
J1
J1 is the path trace byte. The transmit end sends the byte (higher order access point
identifier) successively to inform the receive end that the connection between the two
ends is normal. Once the receive end detects J1 mismatch, the involved VC-4 path
will generate the HP TIM alarm. J1 byte is set as Huawei SBS by default.
C2
payload property. The C2 bytes transmitted should match with those received, once
mismatch is detected, the involved VC-4 path will generate the HP_SLM alarm and
insert all 1s into the C4.

The MST4 have one version: N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX
OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN1500 (A and B).

Table 7-30 shows the technical parameters of the MST4.
Table 7-30 Technical parameters of the MST4
Parameter
Description
Line code pattern
NRZ
Optical interface type
LC (SFP)
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg)
0.9
40
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for

Humidity: 10%100%

7-49
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Cross-Connect and System Control Boards

This chapter introduces cross-connect and system control boards of the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
Refer to Table 4-4 for the name and descriptions of the cross-connect and system
control boards supported by the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500.

8-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE
The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS is the cross-connect and synchronous timing board of the
OptiX OSN 3500. The XCE is a lower-order cross-connect and synchronous timing
board used for extended subracks. The GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE, seated in slot
9 or 10 on the subrack, implement the functions of cross-connection and system
timing.
The GXCS is an ordinary cross-connect and synchronous timing board, but the EXCS
is an enhanced one, and the UXCS is a super one. The UXCS can also be classified
into UXCSA and UXCSB. Table 8-1 shows their differences.
Table 8-1 Comparison among GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Cross-connect
and timing
board
Higher order
cross-connect
capability
Lower order
cross-conne
ct capacity
Usage
GXCSA
40 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
Used for the main subrack, not

supporting the extended subrack.
EXCSA
80 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s

UXCSA
80 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s

UXCSB
80 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s

supporting the 1.25 Gbit/s extended
subrack.
XCE
0 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s
Used for the extended subrack.(Note)
Note: The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack is adopted.
8.1.1 Functionality
Support VC-4 unblocked higher order full cross-connect and VC-3 or VC-12
unblocked lower order full cross-connect. For the cross-connect capacity of
different boards, see Table 8-1.
Provide flexible service grooming capability, and support loopback, cross-connect,

multicast and broadcast services.
Support SNCP protection at VC-3 or VC-12.
The XCE provides 1.25 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect capability and is capable
of adding/dropping up to 504 E1s/T1s.
Support such concatenation services as AU4-4C, AU4-8C, AU4-16C, and

AU4-64C.
Support 1+1 hot backup, with the protection mode being revertive switching and
non-revertive switching.
Support smooth upgrade from GXCS to EXCS or UXCS, with signal failure time
less than 50ms.
Support smooth upgrade from EXCS to UXCS, with signal failure time less than
50ms.

8-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Process S1 byte to realize clock protection switching.
Input and output two channels of synchronization clock, with clock signal set to 2
MHz or 2 Mbit/s.
Communicate with other boards.
8.1.2 Principle
Here takes the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board as an example to introduce their working
principle, as shown in Figure 8-1. The working principle of the XCE board is little
different from that of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS board, only supporting lower order
cross-connect.
Lower order crossconnect matrix
5 Gbit/s or
20 Gbit/s
Higher order crossconnect matrix
VC-4
-48 V
Timing
unit
40 Gbit/s or
80 Gbit/s
Power
module
+3.3 V
+5 V
+2.7 V
Board and system

Clock source
Communication
and control unit
Figure 8-1 Functional block diagram of the GXCS/EXCS/UXCS
1. Higher Order Cross-Connect Matrix
The GXCS performs 40 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect, and the
EXCS or UXCS performs 80 Gbit/s space division higher order cross-connect.
2. Lower Order Cross-Connect Matrix
GXCS or EXCS implement 5 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize unblocked
full cross-connect. UXCS implement 20 Gbit/s lower order cross-connect and realize
unblocked full cross-connect. They are providing the system with powerful service
grooming capability.
3. Timing Unit
Trace the external clock source or internal clock source, providing itself and the
system with the synchronization clock source. At the same time, it provides various
nodes in the data flow of the system with clock signals appropriate to the frequency
and phase, so that the devices at each node can meet the requirements for data setup
time and hold time, and provide the system with framing signals for identifying the
position of the frame head in the data.
4. Control and Communication Unit
Communicate with the SCC and other boards, and ensure communication with other
boards when the SCC is not in position. It also generates various other control signals
8-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

for the GXCS/EXCS and system.

5. Power Module
Provides power supply of various voltages for the board.
8.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 8-2 shows the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS, and XCE.
GXCSA/EXCSA/UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
Figure 8-2 Front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
1. Indicators
There are indicators on the front panel of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to
indicate their working status. The description of the indicators is shown in Table 8-2

8-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 8-2 Indicators of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Indicator
Color and status
Description
STAT (red or
green)
On, green
The board works normally.
On, red
The board hardware fails.
Off
The board is not powered on, or no

service is configured.
On
The service is activated.
Off
The service is not activated.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA

is uploaded successfully, or the board
software is initialized successfully.
On for 100ms and off for

100ms alternatively,
green

is being uploaded.

green
The board software is being initialized,

and is in BIOS boot stage.
On, red

is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service is normal, and no service alarm

occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to

service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to

service.
Off
No service is configured.
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status.
On, red
The clock works in hold-over or free-run

mode.
ACT (green)
PROG (red or
green)
SRV (red, yellow

or green)
SYNC (red or
green)
2. Interfaces
There are interfaces on the front panel of UXCSB/XCE for connecting extended
subrack cables. EXA and EXB backup each other. Through these two interfaces,
the main subrack and the extended subrack can be connected, as shown in Figure
8-3.

8-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

AUX
S
1
0
S S S S S S S S
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
EXB EXA
XCE
S S S S S S S S S
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
FAN
XCE
FAN
EXB EXA
FAN
PQ1/PQM (P)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
PQ1/PQM (W)
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
PIU
PIU
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
D75S/D12S
(1)(2)(3) (4)
Figure 8-3 Configuration of extended subracks

(1) The EXB interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the EXB of the UXCSB (in slot 9)
on the main subrack.
(2) The EXA interface of the XCE (in slot 9) is connected to the EXA of the UXCSB (in slot 9)
(3) The EXB interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the EXB of the UXCSB (in slot 10)
(4) The EXA interface of the XCE (in slot 10) is connected to the EXA of the UXCSB (in slot 10)
The input/output interface for external clock of the cross-connect and synchronous
timing board is on the AUX board. Here only the interface names are given, as shown
in Table 8-3. For a detailed description of relevant interfaces, refer to the interface
description of the AUX board.
Table 8-3 External clock interface of the GXCS, EXCS and UXCS
Interface name
Description
Interface type
CLKO1
75-ohm clock output interface 1
SMB
CLKO2
75-ohm clock output interface 2
SMB
CLKI1
75-ohm clock input interface 1
SMB
CLKI2
75-ohm clock input interface 2
SMB
CLK1
120- ohm clock interface 1
RJ-45
CLK2
120-ohm clock interface 2
RJ-45

The GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE supports 1+1 protection.

8-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


The parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE to be set through NM are as
follows.
1. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM)
is not Started
Primary reference clock
Trace level of clock source
2. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started
Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection

The GXCSA of the OptiX OSN 3500 has two versions: N1 and N2, as described in
Table 8-4.
Table 8-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
Item
Description
Similarity
Board functions and board software are the same.
Difference
Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware.
NM support
The T2000 does not distinguish N1 from N2.
Product
support
Each product version (including V100R001, V100R002 and V100R003)

supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.
The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.
Version
replacement
Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program,

select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the
upgrading will fail.
The EXCSA, UXCSA, UXCSB and XCE have only one version: N1. They are only
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack and extended subrack.
Technical Parameters
Table 8-5 shows the technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE.
Table 8-5 Technical parameters of the GXCS, EXCS, UXCS and XCE
Parameter
Description
GXCSA
EXCSA
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
Higher order
cross-connect capability
40 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
80 Gbit/s
0 Gbit/s
Lower order
cross-connect capacity
5 Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s

8-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Description
GXCSA
EXCSA
External clock
UXCSA
UXCSB
XCE
2 channels, 2048 kbit/s or 2048 kHz
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 40 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.81
2.00
2.00
2.00
1.50
27
62
65
65
25
Long-term working
condition
Short-term working
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for
transportation

Humidity: 10%100%

8-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

8.2 CXL1/CXL4/CXL16
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are boards integrating the functions of the SDH
processing unit, system control & communication unit, cross-connect unit and timing
unit. They are only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and the OptiX OSN 1500.
The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 910 in the OptiX OSN 2500 subrack.
The CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 is seated in slots 45 in the OptiX OSN 1500 subrack.
Table 8-6 shows a comparison among them.
Table 8-6 Comparison among CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Board name
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Line processing capacity
1 x STM-1
1 x STM-4
1 x STM-16
Cross-connect capacity (higher

order)
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
20 Gbit/s
Cross-connect capacity (lower

order) (Note)
5 Gbit/s/20
Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s/20
Gbit/s
5 Gbit/s/20
Gbit/s
Clock function
Same
System control function
Same
Note: The CXL series boards have two versions: Q1 and Q2. The lower order cross-connect capacity
of Q1 version is 5 Gbit/s and that of Q2 version is 20 Gbit/s.
8.2.1 Functionality
1. SDH Processing Unit
The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are responsible for receiving and transmitting
one optical signal at STM-1, STM-4 and STM-16 level respectively. Their optical
interfaces are compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.957, frame structures
compliant with ITU-T Recommendation G.707, and the jitter specifications
compliant with ITU-T G.825 and ITU-T G.958.
The CXL1 supports S-1.1, L-1.1, L-1.2 and Ve-1.2 optical modules for different
transmission distances.
The CXL4 supports S-4.1, L-4.1, L-4.2 and Ve-4.2 optical modules for different
The CXL16 supports I-16, S-16.1, L-16.1 and L-16.2 optical modules for different
The CXL16 supports VC-4-4C, VC-4-8C and VC-4-16C concatenated services.
Support various protection schemes such as two-fiber and four-fiber bidirectional

MS ring protection, linear MSP and SNCP.
Provide abundant alarm and performance events for convenient equipment

Support inloop and outloop at optical interfaces for fast fault location.
Support ALS function, avoiding laser injury to human body during maintenance.
Support on-line query of the board information and the optical power.

8-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Support smooth software upgrade and capacity expansion.
2. System Control & Communication Unit
Configure and groom service, monitor service performance, and collect

performance events and alarm information.
Provide 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for NM connection.
Provide F&f interface through the SEI board for COA management.
Provide one 10/100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between various
boards.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active
and standby CXL.
Provide the OAM interface through SEI, supporting remote maintenance of the
Modem of RS232 DCE.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.
3. Cross-Connect Unit
Implement 20 Gbit/s VC-4 full cross-connection and 5 Gbit/s20/Gbit/s VC-12/VC-3

full cross-connection respectively.
Provide two 4 Mbit/s HDLC emergency paths for MSP and SNCP.
Support flexible service grooming, including loopback, cross-connection, multicast,

and broadcasting.
Provisioning/removing service does not affect other services.
Support SNCP at VC-3 and VC-12 levels.
Support AU4-4C, AU4-8C and AU4-16C concatenated services.
Support 1+1 hot backup protection, both revertive and non-revertive mode. The
default is non-revertive.
4. Timing Unit
Provide standard system synchronization clock.
Input two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals, and is capable of selecting the
external timing source.
Output two 2048 kHz or 2048 kbit/s timing signals.
Provide SSM, extract, insert and process clock ID.
8.2.2 Principle
The CXL16 is taken as an example in the following description. Figure 8-4 shows the
functional block diagram of the CXL16. The CXL16 integrates the STM-16 SDH
processing unit, cross-connect unit, system control & communication unit and timing
unit.

8-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Front panel
Backplane
STM-16 SDH
processing unit
Cross connect unit
System control and

communication unit
Timing unit
Figure 8-4 Functional block diagram of the CXL16
8.2.3 Front Panel

The front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Figure 8-5.
CXL1
CXL16
CXL4
STAT
ACTX
ACTC
PROG
SRVX
SRVL
SYNC
ALMC
STAT
ACTX
ACTC
PROG
SRVX
SRVL
SYNC
ALMC
STAT
ACTX
ACTC
PROG
SRVX
SRVL
SYNC
ALMC
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
OUT
OUT
IN
IN
IN
RESET
RESET
RESET
ALM CUT
ALM CUT
ALM CUT
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Figure 8-5 Front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
1. Indicators
The indicator description of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 is shown in Table 8-7.
8-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 8-7 Indicators of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Indicator
Color and status
Description
STAT
On, green
On, red
Off
The board is not powered on, or service is not

configured.
On, green
The cross-connect unit is in active status.
Off
The cross-connect unit is in standby status.
On, green
The system control & communication unit is in

active status.
Off
The system control & communication unit is in

standby status.
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is

uploaded successfully, or the board software
is initialized successfully.

green

being uploaded.

green
The board software is being initialized, and is

in BIOS boot stage.
On, red

lost, or failed in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service operates normally on the

cross-connect unit.
On, red
Switching (for example, TPS) occurs to the

service on the cross-connect unit.
On, green
Service operates normally on the line unit, and

no service alarm occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to the line

service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to the line

service.
Off
The line service is not configured or no power

supply.
On, yellow
Alarm is cut off permanently.
Off
Alarm is normally provided.
ACTX
ACTC
PROG
SRVX
SRVL
ALMC

8-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Indicator
Color and status
Description
SYNC (red
or green)
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status.
On, red
The clock works in a hold-over or free-run

mode.
2. Interfaces
The interfaces on the front panel of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 boards are shown in
Table 8-8.
Table 8-8 Interfaces of CXL
Name
Description
Function
Line optical interface
LC
Receive and transmit optical signal.

Use swappable optical module for
convenient maintenance.
RESET
Reset button
Press the button to warm reset the SCC

unit.
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch
Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible

alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for three
seconds to cut off audible alarms
permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT
again to enable audible alarms.

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 support 1+1 protection.

The parameters required by the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are as follows.
1. J1
J1 is the path trace byte. It is used to transmit repetitively a higher order access point
identifier so that the receive end can verify its continued connection to the intended
transmit end. When J1 mismatch is detected at receive end, the corresponding VC-4
path will generate an HP_TIM alarm. Value of the J1 is Huawei SBS by default.
2. C2
mismatch is detected, the corresponding VC-4 path will generate an HP_SLM alarm
Table 8-9 associates C2 byte setting to service type.

8-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table 8-9 Correspondence between C2 byte setting and service type
service type
C2 byte setting
E1 or T1
TUG structure
E3 or DS3
34 Mbit/s/45 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-3
E4
140 Mbit/s asynchronously mapped into C-4
Null
Unloaded
3. When There is No External Clock and Synchronization Status Message (SSM)

is not Started
4. When External Clock is Configured and SSM is Started
Type of external building integrated timing supply (BITS)
S1 byte
Threshold for clock switching protection

The CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 have two versions: Q1 and Q2. Except that
cross-connect capacity and software features, the two versions support the same
functions.
Q1CXL1/Q1CXL4/Q1CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and
lower order cross-connect capacity is 5 Gbit/s. On the T2000, the Q1CXL board is
displayed as three logic boards: CXL, SCC and Q1SL1/4/16.
Q2CXL1/Q2CXL4/Q2CXL16: Higher order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s and
lower order cross-connect capacity is 20 Gbit/s. Support intelligent features. On the
T2000, the Q2CXL is displayed as three logic boards: ECXL, GSCC and Q1SL1/4/16.

The technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16 are shown in Table 8-10.
Table 8-10 Technical parameters of the CXL1, CXL4 and CXL16
Parameter
Description
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
Bit rate
155520 kbit/s
622080 kbit/s
2488320 kbit/s
Connector
LC
Dimensions
(mm)
Weight (kg)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

1.12
1.12

8-14
1.12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Power
consumption (W)
Description
CXL1
CXL4
CXL16
40
40
40
CXL1
Optical module
type
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
Le-1.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission
distance (km)
215
1540
4080
80100
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
5 to 0
5 to 0
3 to 2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
28
34
34
34
Receiver overload
(dBm)
10
10
10
Optical module
type
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
Le-4.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1550
1550
Transmission
distance (km)
215
1540
4080
80100
Launched power
(dBm)
15 to 8
3 to 2
3 to 2
3 to 2
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
28
28
28
33
Receiver overload
(dBm)
CXL4
CXL16
Optical module
type
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.1
L-16.2
Wavelength (nm)
1310
1310
1310
1550
Transmission
distance (km)
02
215
1540
4080
Launched power
(dBm)
10 to 3
5 to 0
2 to 3
2 to 3
Receiver
sensitivity (dBm)
18
18
27
28
Receiver
overload (dBm)

8-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Parameter
Description
CXL1
CXL4
Long-term
working condition
Short-term
working condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
CXL16
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%
8.3 SCC/GSCC
The SCC is the system control and communication board, seated in slot 17 or 18.
It functions main control, orderwire, communication and system power monitoring.
The OptiX OSN 3500 also provides the GSCC that supports intelligent features and
extended subrack.
8.3.1 Functionality
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. When the active board fails, the service will
switch to the standby board automatically.
Monitor service performance, and collect performance events and alarm

information.
Provide the F&f interface through the AUX board for management of case-shape
optical amplifier (COA).
Provide one 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface (the port is on the AUX
board) for communication with the NM.
Provide one 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between the active
and standby SCCs.
Process 40 DCCs to provide the transmit link for network management

information.
Process such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and Serial 14.
Provide one 64 k codirectional data interface F1 through AUX.
Provide the OAM interface through AUX, supporting remote maintenance of the
Modem of RS232 data connected equipment (DCE).
Monitor 48 V power supply of the system.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Process 16 housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs.
Support management of intelligent fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Provide PIU with lightening protection and in-position detection function.

8-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

8.3.2 Principle
Caution:
There are four important databases on the SCC: mdb, drdb, fdb0 and fdb1.
The mdb is in the dynamic random-access memory (RAM), saving the current
databases. The drdb is saved in flash RAM. When power failure occurs to NE, the
databases will be recovered in the order of drdbfdb0fdb1. The drdb will be
checked first for configuration data. If the configuration data are safe in drdb, they will
be recovered to mdb from drdb; if they are damaged, data will be recovered from fdb0
or fdb1, depending on which saves the latest data. If data in fdb0 are also damaged,
fdb1 is used for data recovery. Therefore, it is important to back up data to fdb0 and
fdb1 and compare the data in them.
Figure 8-6 shows the functional block diagram of the SCC.

F1
1 orderwire phone
2 SDH NNI phones
Serial 1-4
40 DCCs (D1-D3)
Overhead
processing
module
Power
monitoring
module
Control
module
Communication
module
16 alarm inputs and 4 alarm outputs interface

5 cabinet alarm indicator interface
AUX backup power alarm detection
Fan alarm detection and management
PIU alarm detection and management
NM interface
F&f
OAM
+3.3 V
Power
module
-48 V
+2.7 V
+5 V
Figure 8-6 Functional block diagram of the SCC
1. Control Module
The control module configures and manages boards and NEs, collect alarms and
performance events, and backs up important data.
The control module processes 40 DCC (D1D3) bytes.
2. Communication Module
The communication module provides 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet
interface for NM connection, F&f interface for managing external devices such as
COA, and the OAM interface. The communication module also process 40 DCCs to
provide the transmit link for network management.
3. Overhead Processing Module
The overhead processing module receives overhead signals from the line slot and
8-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

processes such bytes as E1, E2, F1 and serials 14. The overhead processing
module also sends overhead signals to the line board, and externally provides one
orderwire interface, two SDH NNI audio interfaces, interface F1, and the broadcast
data interfaces serials 14.
The position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 8-7.
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2
B2
D4
Serial 4
B2
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
Serial3
E2
Figure 8-7 Position of respective orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
4. Power Monitoring Module
The power monitoring module comprises 48 V power monitoring and working power.
The working power provides the SCC with working voltage and detects and
switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through
AUX).
The 48 V power monitoring module monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX,
monitors fan alarms, monitors and manages the PIU, and processes sixteen
housekeeping alarm inputs and four housekeeping alarm outputs as well as the
cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.3.3 Front Panel

The SCC front panel is shown in Figure 8-8.

8-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

SCC
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
PWRA
PWRB
PWRC
ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
SCC
Figure 8-8 The front panel of the SCC and the GSCC
1. Switch
The switch description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-11

Table 8-11 Switch description of the SCC
Name
Function
RESET
Reset button
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch

Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for three seconds to cut off
audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT

8-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

2. Indicators
The indicator description of the SCC is shown in Table 8-12

Table 8-12 Indicator description of the SCC
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red or
green)
On, green
On, red
Off

On
The service is activated.
Off
The service is not activated.
On, green
The board software or software for

FPGA is uploaded successfully, or the
board software is initialized
successfully.
On for 100ms and off

for 100ms alternatively,
green

FPGA is being uploaded.

green

On, red

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
Service is normal, no service alarm

occurs.
On, red
A critical or major alarm occurs to

service.
On, yellow
A minor or remote alarm occurs to

service.
Off
No service is configured.
On, green
The 48 V power supply A is normal.
On (red/off)
The 48 V power supply A is faulty (lost

or failed).
On, green
The 48 V power supply B is normal.
On (red/off)
The 48 V power supply B is faulty (lost

or failed).
ACT (green)
PROG (red or
green)
SRV (red,
yellow or green)
PWRA (red or
green)
PWRB (red or
green)

8-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Indicator
Status
Description
PWRC (red or
green)
On, green
The 3.3 V protection power is normal.
On, red
The 3.3 V protection power is lost.
On, green
Permanent alarm cut-off.
Off
Give audible warning upon alarm.
ALMC (yellow)
Note: Power supply A indicates the first power input.

Power supply B indicates the second power input.
3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the SCC are led out through the AUX. For details, refer to
the interface description of the AUX.

The SCC has one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500. It does not
support intelligent features or extended subracks.
The GSCC has two versions: N1 and N2. The N1GSCC is applicable to the OptiX
OSN 3500 and supports intelligent features or extended subracks. The N2GSCC is
applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 or OptiX OSN 3500 and supports intelligent
features.

Table 8-13 shows the technical parameters of the SCC.
Table 8-13 Technical parameters of the SCC
Parameter
Description
System control, inter-board communication,

orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)
0.88
10
Long-term operating condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Short-term operating condition
Humidity: 5%95%

Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for transportation

Humidity: 10%100%

8-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

8.4 CRG
The CRG is the system control and clock unit of the OptiX OSN 2500 REG, seated in
slots 910. It implements control, orderwire, communication, and clock assignment
and tracing functions.
8.4.1 Functionality
1. System Control and Communication Unit
Implement service configuration and grooming, monitor service performance, and

collect performance events and alarm information.
Provide the F&f interface through the SEI board for management of case-shape
optical amplifier (COA).
Provide a 10 Mbit/s or 100 Mbit/s Ethernet interface through the SEI board for
communication with the NM.
Provide the RS232 DCE remote maintenance interface (X.25) through SEI,
supporting the access of Modem
Process 40 data communication channels (DCCs) to provide the transmit link for
network management
Process such bytes as E1, Serial 14, F1, D1D12, and ID.
Provide transparent transmission of D1D12 bytes of other manufacturers.
Provide two 485 bus lines for communication between boards. The two lines
backup each other.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s/100 Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interface for communication

between boards, and report of board alarm information and performance
information.
Provide a 10 Mbit/s Ethernet interface for communication between active and

standby SCC boards.
Monitor 48 V power supply of the system.
Support management of fan, such as fan alarm and speed control.
Support control of four cabinet indicators.
Support revertive or nonrevertive switching between active and standby boards

without impact on services.
Support warm reset, cold reset and reset by pressing button. The warm reset does
not affect services.
Support querying board information, which includes board software version, FPGA
version, BIOS version, and board manufacturing information.
2. Clock Unit
Implement system timing function, which complies with the timing characteristics of
SDH equipment slave clocks under REG mode specified in ITU-T G.813.
When REG works normally, the clock at the transmit end is synchronized with that
at the receive end. The clock works in pass-through mode. If the clock at the
receive end is lost, the clock at the transmit end traces the free-run clock in the
equipment. The accuracy is greater than 20 ppm.
Support trace and free-run working modes and switching between the two. The
8-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

current working mode can be queried.
Support processing S1 byte.
Support setting and querying the clock trace source priority table.
The reference clock source of the system clock is the line clock or clock within the
system.
8.4.2 Principle
Figure 8-9 shows the functional block diagram of the CRG.
System control
module
FPGA
2K
Timing
module
Line clock from

line units
-48 V
Communication
module
Power
module
38M
5V
3.3 V
1.5 V
NM interface
F&f
OAM
Boards in
other slots
Detecting
module
Figure 8-9 Functional block diagram of the CRG
1. System Control Module
Configure and manage the board and NEs, collect alarms and performance events,
and backup important data.
It provides:
10 Mbit/s/100Mbit/s compatible Ethernet interfaces for connection with NM and

communication between boards.
F&f interface to manage external equipment such as COA as well as OAM

interface to support maintenance and management.
communication processing function through ECC channel.
3. FPGA
It is a software processing module.

4. Clock Module
When the REG works normally, the clock module extracts and traces the line clock
received by the source end, and provides system clock signals (2 kbit/s or 38 Mbit/s
signals, for example) required by the system.
5. Detection Module
It detects board temperature, power supply (over-voltage and under-voltage), clock

8-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

frequency deviation and failure.

6. Power Module
The power monitoring module comprises 48 V power monitoring and working power.
The working power provides the CRG board with working voltage and detects and
switches the active and standby 3.3 V power supply (which is provided through AUX).
The 48 V power monitoring monitors the +3.3 V power alarm of AUX, monitors and
manages the fan, and processes housekeeping alarm inputs and outputs as well as
the cabinet alarm indicator signal.
8.4.3 Front Panel

Figure 8-10 shows the front panel of the CRG.
CRG
STAT
ACTC
PROG
SYNC
ALMC
RESET
ALM CUT
CRG
Figure 8-10 Front panel of the CRG
1. Switch
The switch description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-14.

Table 8-14 Switch description of the CRG
Name
Function
RESET
Reset button

8-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Name
Function
ALM CUT
Alarm cut switch

Press the ALM CUT to cut off audible alarms for once.
Press and hold the ALM CUT for five seconds to cut off
audible alarms permanently. Press and hold the ALM CUT
2. Indicators
The indicator description of the CRG is shown in Table 8-15.

Table 8-15 Indicator description of the CRG
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red or
green)
On, green
On, red
Off

On
The CRG is in the active status.
Off
The CRG is in the standby status.
On, green

successfully.

green


green

On, red

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or in
initializing.
Off
No power supply.
On, green
The clock works in synchronous status
On, red
Clock source is lost and the clock is

working in the hold-over or free-run
mode.
On
Permanent alarm cut-off
Off
Audible warning upon alarm.
ACTC (green)
PROG (red or
green)
SYNC (red or
green)
ALMC (yellow)

8-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

3. Interfaces
The interfaces provided by the CRG are led out through the SEI. For details, refer to
the interface description of the SEI.

The CRG has one version Q1. It is only applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 REG.

Table 8-16 shows the technical parameters of the CRG.
Table 8-16 Technical parameters of the CRG
Parameter
Description
System control, inter-board communication,

orderwire, and power detection
Dimensions (mm)
262.05 x 220 x 25.4
Weight (kg)
0.90
12
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%

Humidity: 10%100%

Humidity: 10%100%

8-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Other Boards
This chapter introduces the optical amplifier board, built-in WDM unit, power board,
orderwire board and auxiliary interface board of the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The technical details cover:
Functionality
Principle
Front panel
Version description
9.1 LWX
The LWX is an arbitrary rate wavelength conversion board, converting signal of
arbitrary rate (10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s NRZ encoding) at the client side into standard
wavelength optical signal in compliance with G.692.
Table 9-1 shows the slots for the LWX in the OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-1 Slots for the LWX
Product
LWX
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
9.1.1 Functionality
Convert client-side signals into ITU-T G.692 (DWDM) compliant standard

9-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
wavelength signals and transmit the signals transparently.
Provide 3R function for client-side signals (at the rate of 10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s),
perform clock recovery and monitor its rate.
Provide two types of LWX board: one is single-fed single receiving, and the other is
dual-fed signal selection.
The dual-fed signal selection LWX supports intra-board protection, realizing optical
channel protection with one board. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
The single-fed single receiving LWX supports inter-board protection, that is, 1+1
inter-board hot backup protection. The protection switching time is less than 50ms.
Support sub-carrier modulation to realize ECC communication.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Support automatic laser shutdown function (ALS). When no light is received, the
corresponding optical transmitting module will be automatically shut down.
Support inloop and outloop function at optical interface level for fault location.
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient maintenance.
Note:
Sub-carrier modulation: Couple a weak 2.4 Gbit/s signal (after spreading) into the
service signal and then modulate the laser. Obtain 2.4 Gbit/s signal through the
bandpass filter after O/E conversion at the receiving end and then get the original
signal through demodulation.
9.1.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the LWX board is shown in Figure 9-1.
Backplane
ITU-T G.692 wavelength
10 Mbit/s 2.7 Gbit/s
Optical
Client side transponder WDM side
module
10 Mbit/s -
Performance
and alarm
monitoring
SCC
Control and
communication
module
SCC
2.7 Gbit/s
+3.3 V (Standby)
+5 V
Power
module
+2.7 V
+3.3 V
Figure 9-1 Functional block diagram of the LWX

9-2
-48 V
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
The optical transponder module processes 10Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s optical signal received

from the client side. At the DWDM side, the LWX outputs ITU-T G.692-compliant
standard wavelength signal. The optical transponder module can separate one
channel of signal to the performance monitoring circuit for counting B1 bit errors. The
optical transponder module has jitter suppression function which guarantees good
jitter suppression performance.
The LWX receives ITU-T G.692-compliant standard wavelength signal from the
DWDM side. The optical transponder module processes the optical signal and outputs
the 10Mbit/s2.7Gbit/s signal at the client side .
3. Auxiliary Units
Power module
Provide power supply of various voltages for the board.
9.1.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-2 shows the front panel of the LWX board.

9-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
LWX
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
TX RX
OUT1 IN1
OUT2 IN2
LWX
Figure 9-2 Front panel of the LWX
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the LWX.

2. Interfaces
The LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the LWX are described in Table 9-2.
Table 9-2 Interfaces of the LWX
Interface
Type
Description
IN1/IN2
LC
Receive the signals from the optical add/drop multiplexing

board MR2.
OUT1/OUT2
LC
Send signals to the optical add/drop multiplexing board MR2.
TX
LC
Send service signal to client-side equipment.

9-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Interface
Type
Description
RX
LC
Receive the service signal from client-side equipment.
Note: IN1/OUT1 is a pair of receive/transmit optical interfaces, and IN2/OUT2 is another pair.

The LWX has only one version N1. It is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN
2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-3 and Table 9-4 show the optical interface parameters on client side and
DWDM side of the LWX. Table 9-5 shows the technical parameters of the LWX.
Table 9-3 Client-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item
Unit
Description
Bit rate
10 Mbit/s2.7 Gbit/s
Source type
MLM
SLM
SLM
15
80
km
Characteristics of transmitter at point S

Operating wavelength
range
nm
850
12601360
1500158
0
Maximum mean
launched power
dBm
+3
Min. mean launched

power
dBm
10
Min. extinction ratio
dB
+8.2
+8.2
+8.2
Min. side mode

suppression ratio
dB
NA
30
30
G.957
compliant
G.957 compliant
G.957
compliant
PIN
PIN
APD
Eye pattern
Characteristics of receiver at point R
Receiver type
range
nm
12001600
12001600
1200160
0
dBm
18
18
28
Min. receiver overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
27
27
27

9-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Table 9-4 DWDM-side optical interface parameters of the LWX
Item
Unit
Description
Channel spacing
GHz
100
Characteristics of transmitter at point Sn

km
640
170
80
Maximum mean launched

power
dBm
Min. mean launched

power
dBm
+3
+3
+3
Min. extinction ratio
dB
+10
+10
+10
Nominal central frequency
THz
192.10196.
00
192.10196.00
192.10196.00
Central frequency offset
GHz
12.5
12.5
12.5
Maximum 20 dB
spectrum width
nm
0.2
0.4
0.4
Min. side mode

suppression ratio
dB
35
35
35
Dispersion tolerance value
ps/nm
12800
2400
1600
G.957
compliant
G.957
compliant
G.957
compliant
Eye pattern
Characteristics of receiver at point Rn
Receiver type
APD
PIN
range
nm
12001600
12001600
dBm
31
21
Min. receiver overload
dBm
Maximum reflectance
dB
27
27
Table 9-5 Technical parameters of the LWX
Parameter
Description
Line code pattern
NRZ encoding
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)
1.10

9-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
30
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for
transportation

Humidity: 10%100%
9.2 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C are 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing boards,
adding/dropping and multiplexing any adjacent two channels of signals.
MR2A: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2B: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (half-height slot)
MR2C: 2-channel optical add/drop multiplexing board (interface area)
Table 9-6 shows the slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-6 Slots for the MR2A, MR2B and MR2C
OptiX OSN product
MR2A
MR2B
MR2C
OptiX OSN 3500 (80

Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1117
Not supported
Slots 1926, 2936
OptiX OSN 3500 (40

Gbit/s)
Slots 18,
1116
Not supported
Slots 1926, 2936
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58,
1113
Slots 56,
1921
Slots 14, 1518
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 69,
1213
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 69, 13,

1113
Slots 1417
9.2.1 Functionality
Add/drop two adjacent standard wavelengths in compliance with ITU-T G.692

(DWDM), with signals transmitted transparently and operating wavelength ranging
from 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm.
Serve as an OTM or OADM station adding/dropping two channels, as shown in

Figure 9-3.
9-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Two MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards connected in serial can form an OTM station

adding/dropping four channels, as shown in Figure 9-4.
Work with the LWX to form an OADM station to add/drop two channels of signals.
The central wavelength complies with ITU-T, and the channel spacing is 100 GHz.
Drop1
Drop2
Out
In
Drop1
MI
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
Add1
Drop2
Out
MO
In
Add2
Drop1
MI
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
Add1
MO
In
Add2
(1)
Drop2
Out
Add1
MI
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
MO
Add2
(2)
(1) MR2A/MR2B/MR2C can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping two channels.

(2) Two MR2A/MR2C boards connected in serial can serve as an OTM station adding/dropping four
channels.
Figure 9-3 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C serves as OTM station
In
Out
Drop1
Add2
MR2A/
MR2B/
MR2C
LWX
Add1
MI
LWX
Drop2
MO
Figure 9-4 MR2A/MR2B/MR2C and LWX form OADM station adding/dropping two channels of signals
9.2.2 Principle
The functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board is shown in Figure 9-5.

9-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Front
panel
Backplane
Out
Add1
Add2
MI
MO
OADM
module
Drop2
Drop1
In
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C mainly includes the OADM module adding/dropping two

channels of signals. The OADM adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals.
It also provides concatenation interfaces to connect other add/drop multiplexing
boards for more powerful add/drop capability. The MR2A/MR2B/MR2C is a passive
board has no interface with the backplane.
9.2.3 Front Panel

Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the MR2A board. The front panel of the MR2 B and
MR2C is the same as the MR2A board, except the panel dimensions.

9-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
MR2A
CLASS 1
LASER
PRODUCT
OUT
AO1
AO2 M I
MO
DO2
DO1 IN
MR2A
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the MR2A
1. Indicators
None
2. Interfaces
There are four pairs of LC optical interfaces on the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C front panel, as
described in Table 9-7.
Table 9-7 Interfaces of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Interface
Type
Description
A01A02
LC
Access two channels of service signal added locally.
D01D02
LC
Drop two channels of service signal locally.
IN
LC
Receive two channels of multiplexed signal.
OUT
LC
Send two channels of multiplexed signal.
MO/MI
LC
Concatenation interface, through which multiple

MR2A/MR2B/MR2C boards can be concatenated.

9-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards

The MR2A, MR2B and MR2C have only one version: N1. They are applicable to the
OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-8 shows the technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C.
Table 9-8 Technical parameters of the MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
Parameter
Description
Any two adjacent channels with G.692 (DWDM)

compliant standard wavelength, with operating
wavelength being 1535.82 nm to 1560.61 nm
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC
Channel spacing (GHz)
100
Insertion loss (dB)
<2
Adjacent channel isolation

(dB)
>25
Non-adjacent channel
isolation (dB)
>35
0.5 dB channel
wavelength (nm)
<0.11
Dimensions (mm)
MR2A: 262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

MR2B: 111.8 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
MR2C: 262.05 (H) x 110 (D) x 22 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.01
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for
transportation

Humidity: 10%100%

9-11
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.3 BA2/BPA
The BA2 is a 2-port booster amplifier board. The BPA is a booster amplifier &
pre-amplifier board.
Table 9-9 shows the slots for the BA2 and BPA in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-9 Slots for the BA2 and BPA
Product
BA2
BPA
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1117
Slots 18, 1116
Slots 18, 1116
OptiX OSN 2500
Slots 58, 1113
Slots 58, 1113
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Not supported
Not supported
OptiX OSN 1500A
Slots 1213
Slots 1213
OptiX OSN 1500B
Slots 1113
Slots 1113
9.3.1 Functionality
Increase the launched power of line board to +14 dBm or +17 dBm, thus to
achieving a transmission distance of above 120 km or 130 km (in the case of G.652
optical fiber and 0.275 dB/km power loss on such fiber).
The BPA uses the pre-amplifier (PA) module to pre-amplify the received optical
signal and increase the power gain of weak signals to 22 dB25 dB, thus improving
the receiver sensitivity to 38 dBm.
Control automatically laser temperature and optical power of the EDFA module.
Support automatic monitoring of input and output optical power and querying of the
optical power of the EDFA module.
Support report of laser performance parameters.
Support the protection function of EDFA module. When no light is input, the
software will automatically shut down the laser; when light is input again, the
software will automatically start the laser.
Provide abundant alarms and performance events for convenient equipment

Support smooth software upgrade and expansion.
9.3.2 Application
In the long distance transmission, the attenuation of optical signal is great. To make
the optical receiver receive normal optical signal, BA and PA are needed.
The position of BA and PA in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-7.

9-12
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Transmit
9 Other Boards
Receive
BA
PA
Transmit
Receive
Figure 9-7 Position of BA and PA in the network
9.3.3 Principle
Figure 9-8 shows the functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA.
Optical input
Optical output
Optical input
Optical output
Fixed filter
EDFA optical module 1
Pump
current
check
EDFA optical module 2
Module
Input/output
Drive
temperature
pow er
module
control
check
Pump
current
check
Drive
module
Optics part
Input/output
Module
pow er
temperature
check
control
Drive and
check part
A/D and D/A conversion
SCC
Communication
module
Control
module
Data processing and

communication part
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the BA2/BPA
1. Optics Part
This part is composed of two EDFA optical modules for optical amplification.
2. Drive and Check Part
This part provides the EDFA optical modules with drive current, checks working status
of each part of the EDFA optical modules, and forecasts and handles the possible
faults.
This drive and check part also checks the pump current, drives the optical module,
controls the optical module and checks the input and output optical power.
3. Data Processing and Communication Part
This part comprises central processing unit (CPU) and peripheral chips. Analysis of
the measuring result of the check circuit is conducted at this part. Then, the drive
9-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
circuit will be adjusted within the rated range according to the analysis result, so that
the gain of EDFA optical modules and the output optical power can be regulated
above the rated value. Any abnormity indicated by the measured value will be
arranged and reported to NM.
9.3.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the BA2 and BPA is shown in Figure 9-9.
BA2
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 OUT2
IN1
IN2
BA2
BPA
STAT
ACT
PROG
SRV
OUT1 OUT2
IN1
IN2
BPA
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the BA2 and BPA
1. Indicators
There are four indicators on the BA2 and BPA.

2. Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the BA2 and BPA for
9-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
receiving and transmitting optical signal. Using swappable optical module is easy for
maintenance.

The BA2 and BPA have only one version N1. They are applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500.

The technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA are shown in Table 9-10.
Table 9-10 Technical parameters of the BA2 and BPA
Parameter
Description
BA2
BPA
Bit rate
2488320 kbit/s and 9953280 kbit/s
2-channel power
amplification
1-channel power
amplification and
1-channel
pre-amplification
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)
Weight (kg)
1.01
1.01
20
20
Operating wavelength range

(nm)
BA: 15301565
BA: 15301565
Input power range (dBm)
BA: 6 to +3
PA: 1550.12
BA: 6 to +3
PA: 10 to 38
Output power (dBm)
BA: +14 or +17
BA: +14 or +17
PA: 38
Noise figure (dB)
<6.5
BA: <6.5, PA: <6
Type of optical interface
V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2,

V-64.2, U-64.2
V-16.2, U-16.2, L-64.2,

V-64.2, U-64.2
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%

9-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
BA2
BPA

Humidity: 10%100%
Environment for
transportation

Humidity: 10%100%
9.4 COA
The COA, a case-shape optical amplifier, integrates the EDFA module, drive circuit
and communication circuit in an aluminium case. Two types of COA are available:
61COA and 62COA.
Note:
The COA mentioned below includes 61COA and 62COA.
The 61COA is used for 1550 nm window. Its appearance is shown in Figure 9-10. The
61COA is equipped with only one EDFA optical module and can work as optical
amplifier, pre-amplifier or line amplifier. The optical characteristics of the 61COA are
the same as those of the BPA and the BA2. The COA is externally installed and does
not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can be installed in the ETSI cabinet but needs
separate power supply. Each OptiX OSN 3500 can work with up to two 61COAs.
Figure 9-10 Appearance of the 61COA (PA)
The 62COA is a case-shape Raman amplifier used at the receiving end of the SDH
equipment. It inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed Raman
amplification. The gain medium of Raman amplification is the line fiber that can realize
better noise performance. Therefore, the 62COA can extend the transmission
distance, lower the signal-to-noise ratio and realize ultra long hop transmission for a
single span. Figure 9-11 shows the appearance of the 62COA.

9-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
4
2
3
1. Captive screw
4. ESD jack
2. Ejector lever
5. Power access board
3. COA board
Figure 9-11 Appearance of the 62COA
9.4.1 Functionality
The 61COA is an erbium doped fiber amplifier, mainly used as optical booster
amplifier. It can raise the launched optical power of the line board up to +14 dBm or
+17dBm, thus extending the transmission distance.
The 61COA can also work as the preamplifier with the receiver sensitivity of 38
dBm.
The 62COA is configured at the receiving end of the SDH system as a Raman
amplifier. It works with an EDFA of +17 dBm at the transmitting end to realize the
transmission of more than 170 km.
The 62COA provides the preamplification function with the receiver sensitivity of
39 dBm.
The 61COA and 62COA support automatic laser shutdown.
Communicate with the SCC board through RS-232 serial port, report the alarms
and performance events of the local board to the NM and receive configuration
commands from the NM.
The COA is externally installed and does not occupy any slot in the subrack. It can
work separately.
9.4.2 Application
The 61COA is applied in the optical transmission system in the same way as the BA2
and BPA.
The 62COA is a Raman fiber amplifier, used at the receiving end of the optical
transmission system. It amplifies optical signal by means of stimulated Raman
scattering (SRS) effect. The 62 COA needs to work with the EDFA to realize the
transmission of more than170 km, as shown in Figure 9-12.
9-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Raman Amplifier
Signal light
EDFA
Pump light
Pump light
Fiber
Transmitting end
Optical
receiver
Laser
Coupler
Receiving end
Figure 9-12 Application of Raman amplifier (62COA)
The Raman amplifier inputs counter-propagating pump light to fibers for distributed
Raman amplification. Counter pumping means the pump light is injected at the fiber
end and the direction is opposite to the main signals. This kind of pumping results in a
big phase difference between the main signals and the pump light. And the Raman
pump power vibration is leveled in the reverse direction of signal transmission, thus
effectively suppressing the noise created by pump.
9.4.3 Principle
The functional block diagram of the 61COA board is shown in Figure 9-13.
Optical input
Optical output
Fixed filter
EDFA optical module
Pump
current
check
Drive
module
Optics part
Module
Input/output
temperature
power
control
check
Drive and
check part
A/D and D/A conversion
SCC
Communicatio
n module
Control
module
Data processing and

communication part
Figure 9-13 Functional block diagram of 61COA
1. Optics Part
It consists of EDFA to amplify the optical signal.

2. Drive and Check Part
It provides the EDFA with driving current and detects the working status of the
components of the EDFA. It predicts and processes the possible faults.
It implements the functions such as detecting pump current, driving optical module
controlling optical module temperature, and detecting input/output optical power.
9-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
3. Data Processing and Communication Part
It consists of the CPU and peripheral chips. It analyzes the measurement results of the
detected circuit. Based on the analysis, it adjusts the driving circuit within the nominal
range to keep the EDFA gain or power output at the nominal value level. It sorts out
the abnormalities indicated by the measured value and reports to the NM.
The 62COA works in the same way as the 61COA, except that the 62COA uses
Raman amplifier while the 61COA uses EDFA amplifier.
9.4.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the 61COA is shown in Figure 9-14.
9
1. ID DIP switch
5. RS232-2
9. OUT optical port
2. Running indicator
6. MONITOR-1
10. Power switch
10
11
3. Alarm indicator
4. RS232-1
7. MONITOR-2
8. IN optical port
11. 48 V power interface
Figure 9-14 Front panel of the COA
The front panel of the 62COA is shown in Figure 9-15.
1. SC/PC optical interface

4. Fan board
7 RS232-2
10. Power input interface
2. E2000 optical interface

5. RJ-45
8. DIP switch (58 bits)
11. Power switch
3. Air filter
6 RS232-1
9. DIP switch (14 bits)
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the 62COA
1. Indicators
The indicators of the 61COA/62 COA are described in Table 9-11.

9-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Table 9-11 Indicators of the 61COA/62COA
Indicator
Color and status
Description
ALM (Red)
The ALM is constantly on and the

RUN is off
Memory self-check error
Flashing 3 times every other second
Critical alarm
Flashing twice every other second
Major alarm
Flashing once every other second
Minor alarm
Flashing once every 2 seconds
Normal (in service)
Flashing once every 4 seconds
Database protected mode;

communication with the SCC
interrupted
Flashing 5 times every second
Program startup/load
RUN
(Green)
2. Interfaces
Optical interface
There is one pair of SC/PC optical interface on the front panel of the 61COA for
inputting/outputting optical signals.
The input optical interface of the 62COA is of E2000 type, and the output optical
interface is of SC type. The following figure shows the flange and optical fiber
connector used by the input port on the 62COA board.
Figure 9-16 E2000 flange and fiber connector
Caution:
The E2000 fiber jumper integrates a specially designed optical cap. Do not remove
this optical cap during fiber connection. Just insert the fiber connector (with the optical
cap) into the E2000 flange.
RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port
Control & communication interface. It communicates with the SCC, reports alarms
9-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
and performance events.
Note:
The RS-232-1 port on the COA is connected with the F&f port on the subrack through
the serial control cable to realize communication with the SCC.
When there are several COAs on the same station, the RS-232-2 port is employed.
Use serial cable to connect the RS-232-2 of No. 1 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 2
COA, and then the RS-232-2 of No. 2 COA with the RS-232-1 of No. 3 COA. The ports
are all connected in this way. All the COAs communicate with the SCC unit on the
subrack through the RS-232-1 port of No.1 COA, as shown in Figure 9-17.
F&f
RS232-1
RS232-2
Rx
Tx
Tx
GND
SCC
RS232-2
Rx
Tx
Tx
Rx
GND
Tx
Rx
RS232-1
Rx
COA
COA
Figure 9-17 Serial communication between the COA and the SCC
Note:
To concatenate the COAs, the last four digits of the DIP switch on the panel should be
switched to different IDs to identify the COAs. The maximum number of concatenated
subracks of the OptiX OSN 3500 is 2.
MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface
MONITOR-1 and MONITOR-2 serve as the alarm output port when the 61COA is
used alone. The relation between the output alarm and the interface pin is illustrated in
Table 9-12.
Table 9-12 Relation between output alarm and interface pin
MONITOR-1 pin
number
MONITOR-2 pin
number
Definition
1, 6
1, 6
EDFAs input optical power is too low
2, 7
2, 7
Working temperature of the pump laser is

over threshold
3, 8
3, 8
Cool current of pump laser is over

threshold

9-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
MONITOR-1 pin
number
MONITOR-2 pin
number
Definition
4, 9
4, 9
Environment temperature is over

threshold
Digital ground
RJ-45 Ethernet interface
Specially designed for the 62COA, the interface is used to connect a computer to load
the board software.
48 V power interface
It inputs the 48V power from PIU board or power box on the cabinet. The voltage
range under normal working condition: 38.4 V to 57.6 V.
DIP switch
The DIP switch of the 61COA is located on the lower left corner of the panel. It is used
to set the ID of the 61COA. When it is in the upper state, it is OFF. When it is in the
lower state, it is ON. The SCC identifies and communicates with 61COAs with
different IDs.
The DIP switch of the 62COA is used for setting the ID of 62COA and the type of fiber.
For each bit of the 8-bit DIP switch (bit 8 to bit 1 from left to right), up position means 0
and down position means 1. The bits 14 show the board ID, and indicate the ID
number ranging from 20 to 35. Normally the ID number ranges from 20 to 27. The fifth
bit indicates the type of fiber. 0" indicates G.652 fiber, and 1 indicates G.655 fiber.
9.4.5 Installation
The COA adopts case-shape design, not occupying any slot in the subrack. In the
OptiX cabinet, a special bracket is designed to hold the 61COA. The 62COA is
installed directly in the cabinet with the mounting ears.
1. Installation of the 61COA
The bracket is fixed on the crossbars on both sides of the cabinet. The 61COA is
pushed into the brackets along the guide rail and fixed. One bracket can house two
61COAs side by side with the front panel of the 61COA facing the front side of the
cabinet, as shown in Figure 9-18.

9-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Figure 9-18 The position of the 61COA in the ETSI cabinet
2. Installation of the 62COA
The 62COA can be installed in the 300 mm or 600 mm cabinet with mounting ears and
screws. If adopting upward-wiring, the 62COA is installed at the bottom of the ETSI
cabinet (first and third floating nuts). If adopting downward-wiring mode, the 62COA is
installed in any idle place of the 2.6 m high cabinet or in the ETSI cabinet not fully
configured.
9.4.6 Version Description.

The 61COA and 62COA are the externally installed case-shape optical amplifier. Their
logic slots on the NM T2000 are slots 101 and 102. The 61COA and 62COA are
applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 1500. The OptiX
OSN 3500 and OptiX OSN 2500 can be equipped with up to two COAs, but the OptiX
OSN 1500 can be equipped with only one COA.

Table 9-13 shows the technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA.
Table 9-13 Technical parameters of the 61COA and 62COA
Parameter
Description
61COA
62COA
Dimensions (mm)
240 (L) x 190 (W) x 50 (H)
436 (L) x 294 (W) x 86 (H)
Weight (kg)
3.5
10
75
One optical signal
One optical signal
Connector
SC/PC
SC/PC and E2000
(nm)
1550
1550.12
Input optical power range

(dBm)
NA
39 to 20 (2.5 Gbit/s signal

without FEC)

9-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
61COA
62COA
Output optical power

(dBm)
+14/+17
NA
Pump wavelength (nm)
NA
1451.2
Max, on/off gain (dB)
NA
>15 (applied to G.652 fiber)
Noise figure (dB)
NA
<1.5

9-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.5 DCU
The DCU is the dispersion compensation board. It can compensate for the optical
signal dispersion accumulated during transmission in the 10 Gbit/s system. In addition,
it compresses the optical signal and works with the booster amplifier to achieve long
distance optical transmission.
The DCU can be seated in slots 18 and slots 1117 of the OptiX OSN 3500 subrack
and it is only used in the 10 Gbit/s system.
9.5.1 Functionality
Use chirp grating to compensate for the optical dispersion and compress the pulse
signal for signal recovery.
Make dispersion compensation to two channels of optical signals simultaneously,

with the compensation being 1020 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 60 km
G.652 fiber) or 1360 ps/nm (for dispersion generated on 80 km G.652 fiber), or the
free combination of the two.
Work with BA and PA for long distance optical transmission.
9.5.2 Application
After long distance transmission over optical fiber, the pulse of the 10 Gbit/s signal
becomes broadened due to dispersion. The signal is distorted seriously and cannot be
received by the optical receiver normally. Thus, the DCU is needed for dispersion
compensation. Its position in the optical transmission system is shown in Figure 9-19.
Pulse broading
Pulse compressing
Long fiber
Optical
transmitter
BA
PA
DCU
Optical
receiver
1550.12 nm
1550.12 nm
Figure 9-19 The position of DCU in the optical transmission system
Note:
The operating wavelength of the chirp grating of the DCU is 1550.12 nm, so it is
required that the central wavelength of the optical signal sent from the remote optical
interface board is also 1550.12 nm. Otherwise, it is impossible to make dispersion
compensation to the optical signal. And insertion loss is very large and no optical
signal is output.

9-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.5.3 Principle
Figure 9-20 shows the functional block diagram of the DCU.
Input
Chirp grating
IN
Coupler
OUT
Output
Long
Short
w avelength w avelength
Figure 9-20 Functional block diagram of the DCU
The 10 Gbit/s optical signal is sent into IN interface of the coupler, and then to the chirp
grating through the single port of the coupler after an attenuation of 3 dB.
For spectrum components with different wavelengths, the chirp grating has different
reflection positions. The reflection position for short wavelength components is at the
inner part of the grating, which means a longer transport distance. While that for long
wavelength components is at the external part of the grating, which means a shorter
transport distance. Additionally, the delay of signals with different frequencies is
different. As a result, the signals reflected back by the grating is compressed, thus
achieving the compensation effect.
The signal after compensation will be returned to the coupler and then sent out from
the OUT interface after an attenuation of 3 dB. These pulse-compressed optical
signals can be received by receiver and transmitted for a long distance over optical
fiber.
9.5.4 Front Panel

The front panel of the DCU is shown in Figure 9-21.

9-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
DCU
OUT1 OUT2
IN1
IN2
DCU
Figure 9-21 Front panel of the DCU
1. Indicators
None
2. Interfaces
There are two pairs of LC optical interfaces on the front panel of the DCU for receiving
and transmitting two 10 Gbit/s optical signals. Using pluggable optical module is easy
for maintenance.

9-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards

The DCU board has two versions: N1 and N2. The DCU is only applicable to the OptiX
OSN 3500.
The N2 version DCU, as a low insertion loss DCU, brings the insertion loss 3-5 dB
less than what the N1 version DCU brings.
Caution:
When replacing the N1 version DCU with an N2 version DCU, add an attenuator to
avoid optical power overload.

The technical parameters of the DCU are shown in Table 9-14.
Table 9-14 Technical parameters of the DCU
Parameter
Description
Bit rate
9953280 kbit/s
Dispersion compensation for 2 x STM-64 optical

signals
Line code pattern
NRZ
Connector
LC
Dimensions (mm)
H
D
262.05 (H) x 220 (D) x 25.4 (W)

Weight (kg)
0.42
Central wavelength (nm)
1550.12 0.05
0.5 dB bandwidth (nm)
>0.4
Dispersion compensation (ps/nm)
1020 (60 km)

1360 (80 km)
Insertion loss (dB)
<8.3
<3
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%

Humidity: 10%100%

9-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards

Humidity: 10%100%

9-29
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.6 AUX/EOW/SAP/SEI
The AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI are the system auxiliary interface board, providing the
system with various auxiliary interfaces, management interfaces, central backup of
the +3.3 V board power supply, orderwire interface and broadcast data interface.
The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI has one version Q1,
the EOW has one version R1. Table 9-15 shows their slots in OptiX OSN products.
Table 9-15 Slots for the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
Board
Function
Product
Slot
N1AUX
System auxiliary interface

board
OptiX OSN 3500
Slot 37
Q1SAP
System auxiliary processing

board
OptiX OSN 2500
Slot 14
The extended signal interface

board, providing the system
with various auxiliary interfaces
and management interfaces
OptiX OSN 2500

OptiX OSN 2500 REG
Auxiliary
interface area
R1EOW
Orderwire board, providing

orderwire interface and
broadcast data interface
OptiX OSN 1500
Slot 9
R1/R2AUX
System auxiliary interface

board
OptiX OSN 1500
Slot 10
Q1SEI
OptiX OSN 2500 REG
9.6.1 Functionality
Board
Function
N1AUX
R1/R2AUX
R1EOW
Q1SAP
Q1SEI
Management
interface
Provide an
X.25-compliant
OAM interface;
Provide an
X.25-complia
ntOAM/F&f
interface;
Provide a ETH
NM interface.
Provide an
X.25-compliantO
AM interface;
Provide an F&f
serial interface;
Provide a ETH
NM interface ;
Provide an F&f
serial interface.
Provide a
ETH NM
interface.
Provide a EXT
interface to
manage
extended
subracks.

9-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Board
Function
N1AUX
R1/R2AUX
R1EOW
Q1SAP
Q1SEI
Auxiliary
interface
Provide Serial
14 broadcast
data interfaces;
Provide Serial
14
broadcast
data
interfaces;
Provide Serial
14 broadcast
data interfaces;
Provide F1
codirectional
data interface (64
kbit/s).
Provide two BITS

clock
input/output
interfaces with
impedance being
120 .
Provide F1
codirectional
data interface
(64 kbit/s) .
Clock interface
Provide two
2.048 MHz BITS
clock
input/output
interfaces;
Provide two
2.048 Mbit/s
BITS clock
input/output
interfaces .
Housekeeping alarm
interface
Provide
house-keeping
alarm interface
for 16 inputs and
4 outputs;
Provide a output
alarms
concatenating
interface for 4
output alarms.
Cabinet alarm
indicator
Provide a four
cabinet alarms
output interface;
Provide F1
codirectional
data interface
(64 kbit/s),
which also
serves as the
OAM
interface.
Provide two
BITS clock
input/output
interfaces
with
impedance
being 120 .
Provide
house-keepi
ng alarm
interface for
three inputs
and one
output.
Provide two BITS

clock
input/output
interfaces with
impedance being
75 .
Support
house-keeping
alarm input,
output, and output
concatenation.
Provide
house-keeping
alarm interface
for 8 inputs and 4
outputs;
Provide a output
alarms
concatenating
interface for 4
output alarms.
Provide a four
input cabinet
alarms
concatenating
interface.
Drive and
concatenate four
cabinet indicator
signals.

9-31
Provide a four
cabinet alarms
output interface;
Provide a four
input cabinet
alarms
concatenating
interface.
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Board
Function
N1AUX
R1/R2AUX
R1EOW
Q1SAP
Q1SEI
Orderwire
interface
Provide one
orderwire
interface.
Provide one
orderwire
interface.
Provide one
orderwire
interface.
Provide two off

network
signaling
interface.
Provide two off

network signaling
interface.
Provide two off
network audio
interface.
Provide two off

network audio
interface.
Commissionin
g interface
Provide one
commissioning
interface (COM).
Provide one
commissioni
ng interface
(COM).
Provide one
commissioning
interface (COM).
Internal
communicatio
n
Support
communication
between boards
on one subrack.
Support
communicati
on between
boards on
one subrack.
Support
communication
between boards
on one subrack.
Orderwire
processing
Process E1,
E2, F1, Serial
14 bytes.
Process E1, E2,

F1, Serial 14
bytes.
Power backup
and detection
Monitor two 48 V subrack

power supplies and detect
over-voltage (72 V) and
undervoltage;
Monitor two 48 V
subrack power
supplies and
detect
over-voltage (72
V) and
undervoltage
Provide centralized backup of

+3.3 V board power (secondary
power supply 1:N protection).
. Provide
centralized
backup of +3.3 V
board power
(secondary power
supply 1:N
protection).
Detect over-voltage (3.8 V) and

under-voltage (3.1 V) for 3.3 V
standby power supply.
The power is 80 w.
The power is 1000

w.
Detect
over-voltage (3.8
V) and
under-voltage (3.1
V) for 3.3 V
standby power
supply.

9-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Board
Function
N1AUX
R1/R2AUX
R1EOW
Q1SAP
Q1SEI
Audio alarm
Support audio
alarm and alarm
cut-up.
Support
audio alarm
and alarm
cut-up.
Support audio
alarm and alarm
cut-up.
9.6.2 Principle Of AUX

The AUX consists of communication module, interface module and power module.
Figure 9-22 shows its functional block diagram.
NM interface
Auxiliary
interface
Interface
module
Communication
module
+3.3 V
-48 V
Power
module
+3.3 V
+2.7 V
+5 V
Inter-board
communication interface
(standby power
supply for each
board)
Figure 9-22 Functional block diagram of the AUX
Provide the NM interface for active/standby SCCs, OAM interface for remote
maintenance, and interfaces for inter-board communication.
2. Interface Module
Provide various auxiliary interfaces, such as F&f, OAM, F1 and clock input/output.
The N1 AUX and R1/R2 AUX provide different auxiliary interfaces. For details, see
section 9.6.1.
3. Power Module
Provide the AUX with working power, and other boards on the subrack with +3.3 V
centralized backup power.
9.6.3 Principle of EOW

Figure 9-23 shows the functional block diagram of the EOW.

9-33
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Overhead
processing unit
SCC
unit
PHONE
Broadcasting
data interface
and orderwire
processing unit
S1
S2
S3
S4
Ringing current
generating,
resetting, timing
unit
Backplane
Front
panel
Figure 9-23 Functional block diagram of the EOW
The overhead processing module processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 14 bytes. The
position of each overhead byte in the SDH frame is shown in Figure 9-24.
A1
A1
A1
A2
A2
A2
J0
B1
E1
F1
D1
D2
D3
Serial 1 Serial2
AU_PTR
B2
B2
D4
Serial 4
B2
K1
K2
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
S1
M1
Serial3
E2
Figure 9-24 Position of orderwire bytes in the SDH frame
9.6.4 Principle of SAP

Figure 9-25 shows the functional block diagram of the SAP.

9-34
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
1 orderwire phone
Overhead
processing
module
ETH
COM
System
communication
module
Power
monitoring
module
2 SDH NNI phones

1 F1
4 S1-S4
13 communications between boards
2 NM itnerfaces
2 protocol bus
8 alarm inputs/4 alarm outputs
and concatenation
Cabinet indicator activating
and concatenation
2 -48V power monitoring
3.3V backup power monitoring
Front
panel
Backplane
Figure 9-25 Functional block diagram of the SAP
1. Overhead Processing Module
It processes E1, E2, F1, and Serial 14 bytes. Figure 9-24 shows the position of each
orderwire byte in the SDH frame.
2. System Communication Module
It implements communication between 13 boards and provides a bus for transmitting

MSP, SNCP, TPS protection switching and clock protocol.
3. Power Monitoring Module
It detects two 48 V power supplies and 3.3 V backup power supply, and implements
eight house-keeping alarm inputs and four house-keeping alarm outputs and their
concatenation, and the drive and concatenation of four cabinet indicators.
9.6.5 Principle of SEI

Figure 9-26 shows the functional block diagram of the SEI.

9-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Backplane
Protection
and filtering circuits
Front panel
F&f
OAM
F1
Series 4
Series 3
Series 2
Series 1
Clock output interface
Clock input interface
House-keeping alarm output
Outgoing subnet voice
Orderwire interface
Indicator concatenation
Indicator output
House-keeping alarm concatenation
House-keeping alarm output
House-keeping alarm input
Figure 9-26 Functional block diagram of the SEI
The SEI provides a protect and filter circuit. The SEI accesses and sends various
control and management signals to the CXL and SAP for processing.
9.6.6 Front Panel

1. N1AUX
There is an indicator on the N1AUX front panel to show its working status, as
Table 9-16 Indicator of the AUX
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red and

green)
On, green
The +3.3 V power supply is normal.
On, red
The +3.3 V power supply is abnormal, and the AUX

board is fed with the backup power.
Off
Both the +3.3 V working power and the backup

power fail, and the board is fed with no power.
The interfaces of the N1AUX are described in Table 9-17.

9-36
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Table 9-17 Interfaces of the N1AUX
Front panel
STAT
CLKO1
CLKO2
CLKI1
CLKI2
CLK1
CLK2
REV
ETH
F&f
COM
F1
EXT
Interface
Description
Interface
type
CLKO1
75 clock output interface 1
SMB
CLKO2
75 clock output interface 2
SMB
CLK1
120 clock interface 1
RJ-45
REV
Reserved
RJ-45
F&f
F&f interface
RJ-45
F1
F1 interface
RJ-45
PHONE
Orderwire interface
RJ-45
V1
Off network audio interface 1
RJ-45
V2
Off network audio interface 2
RJ-45
PHONE
LAMP1
OAM
OAM interface
RJ-45
V1
LAMP2
S1
Serial 1
RJ-45
V2
ALMO1
S2
Serial 2
RJ-45
OAM
ALMO2
S3
Serial 3
RJ-45
S4
Serial 4
RJ-45
CLKI1
75 clock input interface 1
SMB
CLKI2
75 clock input interface 2
SMB
CLK2
120 clock interface 2
RJ-45
ETH
NM interface
RJ-45
COM
COM commissioning interface
RJ-45
EXT
Extended subrack interface
RJ-45
LAMP1
Cabinet indicator output interface
RJ-45
LAMP2
Input cabinet indicator

concatenating interface
RJ-45
ALMO1
House-keeping alarm
concatenating interface
RJ-45
ALMO2
14 house-keeping alarm output

interface
RJ-45
ALMI1
14 house-keeping alarm input

interface
RJ-45
ALMI2

interface
RJ-45
S1
ALMI1
S2
ALMI2
S3
ALMI3
S4
ALMI4

9-37
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Front panel
Interface
Description
Interface
type
ALMI3

interface
RJ-45
ALMI4

interface
RJ-45
Table 9-18 Pin assignment of CLK1 and CLK2 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Negative receiving end
Positive receiving end
Ground
Negative transmission end
Positive data transmission end
Ground
7 and 8
Not defined.
Table 9-19 Pin assignment of ETH, COM, EXT and F1 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Positive data transmission end
Negative transmission end
Positive receiving end
Not defined.
Not defined.
Negative receiving end
7 and 8
Not defined.
Table 9-20 Pin assignment of F&f interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
RS-232 receiving end
Ground
RS-232 transmission end
1, 2, 3, 6 and 7
Not defined.

9-38
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Table 9-21 Pin assignment of PHONE, V1 and V2 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Signal 1
Signal 2
1, 2, 3, 6, 7 and 8
Not defined.
Table 9-22 Pin assignment of LAMP1 and LAMP2 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
The positive of critical alarm signal
The negative of cirtical alarm signal
The positivie of major alarm signal
The positive of power indicator signal
The negative of power indicator signal
The negative of major alarm signal
The positive of minor alarm signal
The negative of minor alarm signal
Table 9-23 Pin assignment of ALMO1 and ALMO2 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
The positive of critical alarm output signal
The negative of cirtical alarm output signal
The positivie of major alarm output signal
The positive of alarm 1 output signal
The negative of alarm 1 output signal
The negative of major alarm output signal
The positive of alarm 2 output signal
The negative of alarm 2 output signal

9-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Table 9-24 Pin assignment of OAM interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Request to send
Data terminal ready
Transmit data
GND
GND
Receive data
Data set ready
Ready to recieve
Table 9-25 Pin assignment of S1, S2, S3 and S4 interface
Front view
Pin No.
Description
The positive of RS-422 data transmission
The negative of RS-422 data transmission
The positivie of RS-422 data recieving
RS-232 data recieving
Ground
The negative of RS-422 data recieving
Not defined.
RS-232 data transmission
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Alarm input 1
The ground of alarm input 1
Alarm input 2
Alarm input 3
Alarm input 4

9-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Alarm input 5
Alarm input 6
Alarm input 7
Alarm input 8
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Alarm input 9
Alarm input 10
Alarm input 11
Alarm input 12
Front view
Pin No.
Description
Alarm input 13
Alarm input 14
Alarm input 15
Alarm input 16

9-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
2. R1/R2AUX
There is no indicator on the R1/R2AUX front panel.

The interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel are described in Table 9-30.
Table 9-30 Interfaces on the R1/R2AUX front panel
Interface
Description
Interface type
ETH
NM interface
RJ-45
COM
Commissioning interface
RJ-45
CLK
120 external clock input/output

interface
RJ-45
ALM
House-keeping alarm input/output

interface
RJ-45
OAM/F&f
NM and management serial interface
RJ-45
3. EOW
There are two indicators on the EOW front panel as described in Table 9-31.
Table 9-31 Indicators of the EOW
Indicator
Status
Description
STAT (red or
green)
On, green
On, green
Off

On, green

successfully.

100ms alternatively, green



On, red

FPGA is lost, or failed in uploading or
in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
PROG (red or
green)

9-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
The interfaces on the EOW front panel are described in Table 9-32.
Table 9-32 Interfaces of the EOW
Interface
Description
Interface type
PHONE
Orderwire interface
RJ-11
S1
Broadcast data interface S1
RJ-45
S2
RJ-45
S3
RJ-45
S4
RJ-45
4. SAP
There are indicators on the SAP front panel. For their description, see Table 9-31.
The interfaces on the SAP front panel are described in Table 9-33.
Table 9-33 Interfaces of the SAP
Interface
Description
COM
Commissioning interface
ETH
NM interface
5. SEI
There is no indicator on the Q1SEI front panel.

The interfaces on the SEI front panel are described in Table 9-34.
Table 9-34 Interfaces of the SEI
Interface
Description
Interface
type
Interface
Description
Interface
type
ALMO1
4 house-keeping
alarms output
interface
RJ-45
ALM1
4 house-keeping
alarms input
interface
RJ-45
ALMO2
4 output
house-keeping
alarms
concatenating
interface
RJ-45
ALM2
4 house-keeping
alarms input
interface
RJ-45

9-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Interface
Description
Interface
type
Interface
Description
Interface
type
LAMP1
4 cabinet alarm
indicators output
interface
RJ-45
S1
Serial 1
RJ-45
LAMP2
4 input cabinet alarm

indicators
concatenating
interface
RJ-45
S2
Serial 2
RJ-45
OAM
OAM interface
RJ-45
S3
Serial 3
RJ-45
F1
F1 interface
RJ-45
S4
Serial 4
RJ-45
F&f
F&f interface
RJ-45
V1
Off network audio

interface 1
RJ-45
PHONE
Orderwire interface
RJ-45
V2
Off network audio

interface 2
RJ-45
CLK1
120 clock 1
RJ-45
18
Reserved
RJ-45
CLK2
120 clock 2
RJ-45
20
Reserved
RJ-45
CLKO1
75 clock output 1
SMB
CLKO2
75 clock output 2
SMB
CLK1
75 clock input 1
SMB
CLK2
75 clock input 2
SMB
ALMO1 ALMO2
LAMP1 LAMP2 OAM
F1
F&f
PHONE CLK1
CLK2
CLKO1 CLKO2
ALM1
ALM2
S1
S2
S3
S4
V1
CLKI1 CLKI2
V2
9.6.7 Alarm Concatenation

1. House-keeping alarm concatenation
Figure 9-27 shows the connection of alarm input and output of a single or multiple
OptiX OSN 3500 subrack. Figure 9-28 shows the connection of alarm input and output
of a single or multiple OptiX OSN 2500 subrack. Connect the alarm output interface to
the alarm concatenation interface downstream. Make the connections one by one
until the alarm output is connected to the centralized alarm system.

9-44
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Cabinet 1
Centralized
alarm system
Cabinet 2
Subrack 1
Subrack 3
ALMO1
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO2
ALMI1
ALMI1
Subrack 2
Subrack 4
ALMO1
ALMO1
ALMO2
ALMO2
ALMI1
ALMI1
To the
centralized
alarm system
ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 1
ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 3
ALMO1 ALMO2
ALMO1 ALMO2
Subrack 2
Subrack 4
Cabinet 1
Cabinet 2
2. Cabinet alarm indicator connection
The connection of the four OptiX OSN 3500 cabinet alarm indicators is shown in
Figure 9-29. The connection of the four OptiX OSN 2500 cabinet alarm indicators is
shown in Figure 9-30. Connect the cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 2
to the concatenated cabinet alarm indicator input of subrack 1, and then connect the
cabinet alarm indicator signal output of subrack 1 to the indicator interface on the top
of the cabinet.

9-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
4 cabinet
alarm indicators
Cabinet indicator
subrack 1
LAMP1
LAMP2
subrack 2
LAMP1
LAMP2
Cabinet
indicators
LAMP1
LAMP2
Subrack 2
LAMP1
LAMP2
Subrack 1
Cabinet
9.6.8 DIP Switch and Jumper

The jumper J9 at the lower right part of the N1AUX board is used to set the OptiX OSN
3500 as the main subrack or extended subrack, as shown in Table 9-35.
Table 9-35 Jumper J9 setting
Jumper
Setting
Description
J9
shorted
Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the main subrack.
Not shorted
Set the OptiX OSN 3500 as the extended subrack.

The AUX has three versions: N1, R1 and R2. The SAP and SEI have one version Q1
and the EOW has one version R1. For the application of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
in OptiX OSN products, see Table 9-15.
9-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards

Table 9-36 Technical parameters of the AUX, EOW, SAP and SEI
Parameter
Description
N1AUX
R1/R2AUX
EOW
SAP
SEI
Dimensions
(mm)
262.05 (H) x
110 (D) x 44
(W)
111.8 (H) x
220 (D) x 25.4
(W)
111.8 (H) x
220 (D) x 25.4
(W)
262.05 (H) x
220 (D) x 25.4
(W)
290 (H) x 30
(D) x 25.4
(W)
Weight (kg)
0.96
0.96
0.40
0.71
0.91
Power
consumption
(W)
19
19
10
20
10
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment
for storage
Environment
for
transportation
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

9-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.7 PIU
The PIU or PIUA is a power interface board.
It functions power access, lightening protection and filtering.
The PIU has three versions: N1, Q1 and R1. The PIUA has one version R1.
The N1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28.
The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG and
seated in slots 22 and 23.
The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19.
The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.
9.7.1 Functionality
Provide lightning protection function and report the lightning protection failure
alarm.
Enhance the electro magnetic compatibility (EMC) of the system by filtering and
shielding the power supply.
Report the board in position information.
Support 1+1 hot backup protection. Any one PIU can provide power for the whole
subrack independently.
Supply the FAN board with 48 V20% power.
The N1PIU provides two 50 W power interfaces for external devices such as COA
and HUB. The Q1PIU and R2PIU provide one 50 W power interface for external
devices such as COA and HUB. The R1PIU does not provide external power
interface.
The R1PIU provides a 75 clock input interface and a 75 clock output interface,
and protects the clock signal.
9.7.2 Principle of N1PIU and Q1PIU

Figure 9-31 shows the functional block diagram of the N1PIU and Q1PIU.
BGND
-48V
Pow er
access
unit
Lightning
protection
unit and
failure
detection
Filter unit
Lightning protection unit failure alarm
Backplane
SCC
Figure 9-31 The principle block diagram of the PIU
1. Power Access Unit
The power access unit accesses the 48/60 V power for the system.
2. Lightning Protection Unit
The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection. The PIU will
9-48
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
report the failure of lightning protection unit to the SCC.

3. Filter Unit
The filter unit uses the electromagnetic interference (EMI) filter to filter the EMI signal
to guarantee the stable operation of the equipment.

Figure 9-32 shows the functional block diagram of the R1PIU.
NEG(-)
NEG(-)
Lightning
protection
unit
Filter
unit
RTN(+)
RTN(+)
Power
detection
Clock input
LED indication
Clock
protection
Clock output
The power access unit accesses the 48/60 V power for the system.
The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.

3. Filter Unit
4. Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power
through an indicator.
5. Clock Protection
Protect the input clock signal.

Figure 9-33 shows the functional block diagram of the R2PIU.

9-49
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
External
power supply
interface
NEG(-)
Lightning
protection
unit
RTN(+)
Filter
unit
Power
detectio
n
NEG(-)
RTN(+)
Fan power
unit
LED
indication
The power access unit accesses the 48 V/60 V power for the system.
The lightning protection unit is for overcurrent and lightning protection.

3. Filter Unit
4. Power Detection
Detect whether the input power fails and indicates the status of the input power
through an indicator.
5. Fan Power Unit
Provide the fan with regulated power supply.

6. External power interface unit
Provide external equipment (COA) with 48 V power. The power interface is on the
front panel.
9.7.5 Front Pane

1. N1PIU
The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-34.

9-50
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Figure 9-34 Front panel of the N1PIU
There are power interfaces on the N1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-37.
Table 9-37 Interfaces on the N1PIU front panel
Interface
Description
PWR
48 V power access interface
PS1/PS2
50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
2. Q1PIU
The Q1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-35.
Figure 9-35 Front panel of the Q1PIU

9-51
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
There are power interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel, as described in Table 9-38.
Interface
Description
PWR
48 V power access interface
PWS
50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB
3. R1PIU
The R1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-36.
There is an indicator on the R1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-39.

Table 9-39 Indicator of the R1PIU
Indicator
Status
Description
Power indicator
(POWER)
On, green
Power input is normal.
Off
No power input or power failure
There are interfaces on the Q1PIU front panel as described in Table 9-40.
Interface
Description
PWR
48 V power input interface
ClK IN
75 clock input interface (SMB)
ClK OUT
75 clock output interface (SMB)
4. R2PIU
The N1PIU front panel is shown in Figure 9-37.

9-52
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
The indicator on the R2PIU front panel is the same as that on the R1PIU. Refer to
Table 9-39.
There are two interfaces and one switch on the R2PIU front panel, as described in
Table 9-41.
Table 9-41 Indicators and the switch on the R2PIU front panel
Interface
Description
PWR
48 V power input interface
PWS
50 W power output interface, supplying power for COA or HUB.
Power switch
Switch on the power by pushing the switch to the ON (1) position.

Switch off the power by pushing the switch to the OFF (0)
position.

9-53
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards

The NIPIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500 and seated in slots 27 and 28.
The Q1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 2500 and OptiX OSN 2500 REG, and
seated in slots 22 and 23.
The R1PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500B and seated in slots 18 and 19.
The R2PIU is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500A and seated in slots 1 and 11.

Table 9-42 Technical parameters of the PIU
Parameter
Description
N1PIU
Q1PIU
R1PIU
R2PIU
Input voltage
38.4 V to 72
V
38.4 V to 72 V
38.4 V to 72 V
38.4 V to 72 V
Protecion tube
F7
Main loop:
Main loop:
250V-20A-0.003
55
Main loop:
250V-10A-0.006
Main loop:
250V-10A-0.006
Dimensions
(mm)
262.05 x 110 x
44
220 x 74 x 44
108 x 110 x 41.5
111.8 x 220 x
25.4
Weight (kg)
1.15
1.25
1.25
1.5
Power
consumption
(W)
Long-term
operating
condition
Short-term
operating
condition
Environment
for storage
Environment
for
transportation
250 V-20
A-0.00355
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%

9-54
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.8 UPM
The uninterruptible power module (UPM), numbered GIE4805S, is a special power
supply system. It can convert 110 V/220 V AC power supply directly to 48 V DC
needed by transmission equipment, such as OptiX OSN 2500/1500. It is suitable for
telecom carriers who do not have 48 V DC power supply equipment or who require
storage batteries.
The UPM power supply system consists of a power box (from 110 V/220 V to 48 V)
and storage batteries. The output power of each UPM is 2 x 270 W. The power box is
1U high and can be installed directly in the 19-inch or ETSI cabinet. The appearance
of the power box is shown in Figure 9-38.
E4
GI
5S
80
Figure 9-38 Appearance of the power box
Note:
The UPM is displayed as a CAU board on the T2000. You can operate the CAU to
manage and maintain the UPM power system.
The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the
mains 110V/220V AC supply is interrupted, the battery module can supply power for
nearly 4 hours. Only one power box is needed to connect to storage batteries when
used with OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500. For more detailed information, refer to
OptiX OSN 2500 Intelligent Optical Transmission System Installation Manual.

9-55
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.8.1 Functionality
The OptiX OSN 2500 or OptiX OSN 1500 needs to be configured with two power
boxes and four 12 V-40 Ah storage batteries. If the equipment does not need storage
battery, one power box is all right. Each power box is configured with two rectifier
modules and one monitoring module (standard configuration).
1. Hot Backup
The power conversion part of the UPM power supply system adopts two AC/DC
rectifier modules for hot backup, and the rectifier module can balance load during
working. If one rectifier module fails, the other will take over all the load immediately,
not affecting the service on the equipment and thus enhancing the stability of the
system.
2. Hot-Swap
In the UPM power supply system, the AC/DC rectifier module is hot-swappable. When
the faulty rectifier module is replaced, the other one is still working normally.
3. Storage Battery Protection
The UPM power supply system can be protected by the storage battery. When the
mains supply is interrupted, the UPM power system can switch automatically to the
storage battery, ensuring normal operation of the equipment. The battery module can
provide 40 Ah capacity.
4. Monitoring Function
The UPM power supply system integrates module monitoring and NM monitoring
functions. The monitoring module can monitor and control the rectifier module, the
parameters and status of AC/DC and the battery group in real time and report them to
the transmission NM. The battery can achieve floating charge and current limitation
management.
5. Loading Capacity
The load bearing capability of each rectifier module is designed to be 270 W.
9.8.2 Principle
The UPM power supply system is supplied by one 220 V AC mains power. The input
AC power is rectified into 48 V DC voltage by the rectifier module to provide two DC
branches and one battery branch to the users.
Under normal conditions, the rectifier module, storage battery loop and load loop work
according to pre-defined parameters or user settings and they are under control of the
monitoring module. The monitoring module monitors various statuses and data.
In case of mains supply failure, the equipment will be supplied by storage batteries
connected to the UPM power supply system. The batteries must be connected to the
UPM power supply system before mains supply failure happens. When batteries start
to discharge due to mains supply failure, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of no
mains supply. With the discharge of batteries, battery voltage starts to drop. When
battery voltage is lower than 45 V, the monitoring unit will report the alarm of DC
under-voltage. When battery voltage reaches 43 V termination voltage, batteries will
initiate power disconnection protection to cut connection of batteries with equipment to
achieve automatic protection of batteries.
9-56
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
When mains supply is recovered, the UPM power supply system resumes normal
operation.
9.8.3 Front Panel

The rear view of the power box is shown in Figure 9-39.
1
AC100~240
RUN ALM
ALM Vout
ALM Vout
RS232
1. AC input
5. Load
2. Rectifier module/air outlet

6. Load
3. Communication interface
4. Battery interface
Figure 9-39 Rear view of the power box
1. Indicators
There are two indicators (ALM and Vout) on the left side of the front panel of each
rectifier module and two indicators (ALM and RUN) on the front panel of the
monitoring module.
When the power box works normally, the Vout indicators of the two rectifier modules
are on (green) and the RUN indicator of the monitoring board is flashing (green).
Table 9-43 Indicators of the power box
Module
Indicator
Status
Description
Rectifier
module
ALM
On (red)
The rectifier module is faulty.
Vout
On (green)
The output of the rectifier is normal.
Monitoring
module
RUN
Flashing (green)
The power system is normal.
ALM
On (red)
The power system is faulty.
2. Interfaces
The interfaces of the power box are described in Table 9-44.

Table 9-44 Interfaces on the power box front panel
Interface
Description
AC100240
It is an AC mains input socket for accessing 110 V/220 V AC

power.
Red on/off button
It is at the upper right corner of the front panel of the rectifier

module. You can enable/disable the rectifier module by
pressing the button.

9-57
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Interface
Description
RS-232
communication
interface
Through this interface the UPM power supply system can

communication with the SCC board of OptiX OSN products to
report alarms and realize remote control. (The RS-232 serial
port of one power box is connected to the F&f interface of OptiX
OSN products, the RS-232 serial port of the other power box is
connected to the ALM1 interface of the OptiX OSN products.)
Power output
interface
There are three power output interfaces on the right of the

power box. The one above is battery interface, through which
the power box connects to the battery input socket at the back
of the storage battery box with battery cable. The two
interfaces below are load interface. They can supply power to
OptiX OSN products through power cable.
9.8.4 Precautions
The battery input interface and load input interface shall not be mixed. Otherwise
the UPM power supply system cannot work normally.
When load is added with power on, the strict tool and personal insulation measures
must be taken to avoid accidents during operation.

Table 9-45 shows the technical parameters of the UPM.
Table 9-45 Technical parameters of the UPM
Parameter
Description
AC input voltage range
90 V264 V AC
AC input
One channel of monophase three-wire AC power: 47

Hz63 Hz
Rated input current
3.5 A
Output nominal voltage
54.0 V0.5 V
Rated output current
10 A (two user load branches with each current not

more than 5 A)
Number of backup battery

groups
1 group (40 Ah)
Charging current of backup

battery
3 A
Backup battery fuse
10 A
Storage battery: DC
under-current point
450.5 V
Storage battery: termination

voltage point
430.5 V

9-58
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
Storage battery: floating

charge voltage
54.00.5V
Regulated voltage precision
1%
Non-balance of load
sharing
5% (50%100% load)
Rated efficiency of
integrated equipment
80%
Peak stray noise voltage
200 mV
Voltage drop in the power

panel (20)
500 mV
Network adjustment rate
0.1%
Dimensions of a power box
438 mm x 240 mm x 44 mm
Dimensions of a storage
battery
197 mm x 165 mm x 170 mm
9.9 FAN
The OptiX OSN equipment uses the modularized fan, as shown in Figure 9-40. The
FAN is a fan control board, responsible for fan speed adjustment, fan failure detection
and failure report, as well as report of the fan not-in-position alarm.
The fan has two versions N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 3500
and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.
The OptiX OSN 3500 subrack uses three fan boxes.
The OptiX OSN 2500 subrack uses two fan boxes.
The OptiX OSN 1500 subrack uses one fan box.
Figure 9-40 Appearance of the FAN (OptiX OSN 3500)

9-59
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.9.1 Functionality
The fan boxes support hot swapping.
Power supplies for N1 fan boxes are for mutual backup.
Provide intelligent fan speed adjustment, which is reflected in the following

aspects:
Adjust the fan speed automatically
When one fan goes faulty, others operate at their full speeds
When the speed-adjusting signal is not normal, control the fans to operate at
their full speeds.
Detect fan failure.
Reports alarms and online information of fans.
Provide an indicator on front panel to indicate the running status.
9.9.2 Principle of N1FAN

Figure 9-41 shows the functional block diagram of the N1FAN.
Status signal
Speed adjusting signal
Status ouput
Pow er
supply
FAN
Fan
Alarm output
External pow er ground 1
Pow er supply
Pow er ground
External pow er supply 1
Fan pow er board
External pow er supply 2

Figure 9-41 Functional block diagram of the N1FAN
1. Fan Power Board
The FAN provides the fans with drive voltage.

2. Fan Control Board
The value of the drive voltage is controlled by the fan speed-adjusting signal for
different rotating speeds. The fan control board also detects the failure of the fans, fan
power board and itself. At fault occurrence, it will report alarm to the SCC for sending
command to make the other two fans operate at their full speeds. The FAN also
receives the turn-off command in case of low temperature and turn off the fans. The
following items involves in the detection by the fan control board: failure of the fan
power board, fault of the speed-adjusting signal, fan failure, and fan in-position.

9-60
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
9.9.3 Principle of R1FAN

Figure 9-42 shows the functional block diagram of the R1FAN.
48 V 1
48 V 2
GND1
GND2
GND
Power
access
unit
GND
48 V
Delay
start unit
Fan
48 V
48 V
GND
Fan alarm
signals
Voltage
drop unit
48 V
Status
detection
unit
GND
Figure 9-42 Functional block diagram of the R1FAN
Provide 48 V power for the FAN.

2. Status Detection Unit
Detect the status of the FAN. It reports the fan failure to the CXL and drive the
corresponding alarm indicator when any of the six fans stops.
9.9.4 Front Panel

1. N1FAN
There is an indicator on the front panel of the FAN to show its working status, as
Table 9-46 Indicator of the N1FAN
Indicator
Color
Description
STATE (red, yellow

and green)
On, green
The fan operates normally.
On, red
The fan, fan power board or fan control board is

abnormal.
On, yellow
The fan is turned off due to low temperature.
2. R1FAN
The R1FAN front panel is shown in Figure 9-43.

9-61
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
FAN
RUN
ALM
Figure 9-43 Front panel of the R1FAN
The indicators on the R1FAN front panel are described in Table 9-47.
Table 9-47 Indicators of the R1FAN
Indicator
Color
Description
RUN
On, green
The board operates normally.
Off, green
The board is not powered.
On, red
A fan stops.
Off, red
The fans operate normally.
ALM

The FAN has two versions: N1 and R1. The N1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN
3500 and OptiX OSN 2500, and the R1FAN is applicable to the OptiX OSN 1500.

Table 9-48 Technical parameters of the FAN
Parameter
Description
N1FAN
R1FAN
Dimensions (mm)
50.8 x 120 x 120
120 x 25.4 x 220
Weight (kg)
1.50
1.01
Power consumption
(W) (Note)
15 (the input voltage is 48

V)
20 (the input voltage is 48 V)
Working voltage
48 V20% DC

9-62
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

9 Other Boards
Parameter
Description
N1FAN
Long-term operating
condition
condition
Environment for
storage
Environment for
transportation
R1FAN
Humidity: 10%90%
Humidity: 5%95%
Humidity: 10%100%
Humidity: 10%100%
Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.

9-63
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
10
Cables
This chapter describes the cables in the following aspects: cable classification, cable
structure, connector, and pin assignment. Cables used by the OptiX OSN 3500,
OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX OSN 1500 include:
Fiber jumper
Power cable and grounding cable
Alarm cable
Management cable
Clock cable
Signal cable
10.1 Fiber Jumper

10.1.1 Classification
The fiber jumpers used by the OptiX OSN 3500 are classified as shown in Table
10-1.
10-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Table 10-1 Classification of fiber jumper
Usage
Connector 1
Connector 2
Cable
Length
Optical fiber
connecting OSN
equipment to the
ODF or other
equipment
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
6 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, 50 m
2 mm MLM
optical fiber
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
m, 30 m, 50 m
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, 50 m
2 mm MLM
optical fiber
10 m, 20 m, 30 m,
50 m
LC/PC
Optical fiber
connecting OSN
equipments
SC/PC
SC/PC
SC/PC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
2 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
m, 30 m, 50 m, 80
m
LC/PC
LC/PC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
1.5 m, 3 m, 5 m,
10 m, 20 m, 30 m
2 mm MLM
optical fiber
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20
m, 30 m
LC/PC
FC/PC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
6 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, 50 m
LC/PC
SC/PC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
5 m, 10 m, 20 m,
30 m, 50 m
LC/PC
E2000/APC
2 mm SLM
optical fiber
NA
Select fiber connector and fiber length according to the on-site survey. The OptiX
OSN 3500/2500/1500 uses LC/PC fiber connector (SC/PC for the N2OU08 board).
The IN interface on the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC connector.
Caution:
Multi-transverse mode optical transmitting module needs to be connected to
multi-mode fiber; the single-longitudinal mode or multi-longitudinal mode optical
transmitting module needs to be connected to single-mode fiber.
10.1.2 Connector
Most optical interfaces on the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/2500 board front panel are of
LC/PC type, as shown in Figure 10-1. The N2OU08 board provides SC/PC optical
10-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
interface. The IN interface of the externally-installed 62COA uses E2000/APC

connector, as shown in Figure 10-4.
On the client-side ODF, the FC/PC or SC/PC optical interface is used. The matched
FC/PC and SC/PC connectors are shown in Figure 10-3 and Figure 10-2
respectively. The four types of connector are described in Table 10-2.
Table 10-2 Classification of fiber connector
Internal fiber connector
Description
LC/PC
Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
E2000/APC
Connector with dust-proof cover/protruding polished (8)
FC/PC
Round fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC
Square fiber connector/protruding polished
1. LC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the LC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-1.
Figure 10-1 LC/PC optical interface
The plugging/unplugging of LC/PC optical interface only needs axial operation

instead of rotation.
When inserting the fiber jumper with LC/PC connector, be careful to align the head of
the fiber jumper with the optical interface on the optical board and push in the fiber
with proper strength. When pulling it out, press the clip first, then push fiber
connector inward slightly, and then pull out the connector.
2. SC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the SC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-2.
10-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Figure 10-2 SC/PC Optical interface
3. FC/PC Optical Interface
The appearance of the FC/PC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-3.
Figure 10-3 FC/PC optical interface
4. E2000/APC Optical Interface
The appearance of the E2000/APC optical interface is shown in Figure 10-4.
10-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Figure 10-4 E2000/APC optical interface
10.2 Power Cable and Grounding Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables are listed in
Table 10-3.
Table 10-3 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 power cables and grounding cables
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
Cabinet 48V/BGND/PGND
power cable
Cabinet 48V/BGND/PGND
power cable
Cabinet
48V/BGND/PGND
power cable
Cabinet door grounding

cable
Cabinet door grounding

cable
Subrack power cable
Subrack power cable
Equipment 48 V/-60
V power cable/PGND
power cable
HUB/COA power cable
HUB/COA power cable
UPM power cable
UPM power cable
10.2.1 Cabinet 48 V/BGND/PGND Power cable

48 V, BGND and PGND power cables are used for supplying power to the
equipment in the cabinet. One end of the power cable connects to the power
distribution cabinet and grounding bar in the equipment room, and the other end
connects to the power distribution box at the cabinet top.
1. Structure
The structure of the 48 V cabinet power cable/BGND power cable is shown in

Figure 10-5. The PGND power cable is shown in Figure 10-6.
10-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
3
1. Naked connector
2. Naked connector-OT type
3. Cable tie
Figure 10-5 48 V cabinet power cable/cabinet BGND power cable
1. Naked connector-OT type

4. Heat-shrink tube
7. Heat-shrink tube
2. Cable tie
5. Main tag
3. Naked connector
6. Wire
Figure 10-6 Cabinet PGND power cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
3. Technical Parameters
Item
48 V cabinet
power cable
Description
Connector 2
Naked crimping terminal-OT type-16 mm2-M8-tin

plating-naked ring terminal
Connector 1
Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-length 24

mm-inserted 12 mm deep-80A-green
Cable type
Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and

bllue-85A
10-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Cabinet
BGND
grounding
cable
Cabinet
PGND
grounding
cable
Description
Connector 2

Connector 1
Single cord end terminal-16 mm2-24 mm-inserted

12 mm deep-80A-green
Cable type
Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-round and

black-85A
Connector 1

Connector 3
Naked crimping connector-JG2-16 mm2-M6-95A-tin

plating
Cable type
Power cable-450 V/750 V-16 mm2-yellow and

green-85A
Fireproof level
CM
Length
10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.2.2 Cabinet Door Grounding Cable

The cabinet door grounding cable grounds the front door, rear door and side panels.
This cable is installed before delivery.
1. Structure
The structure of the cabinet door grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-7.
1. Naked connector--OT6-6
2. Heat-shrink tube
3. Main tag
Figure 10-7 Structure of the cabinet door grounding cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
10-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Naked crimping terminal-OT-6mm2-M6-tin

plating-insulated ring terminal-12~10AWG
Cable
Model
Wire-600 V-UL1015-10AWG-50A-yellow and green
Fireproof level
CM
Length
350 mm
10.2.3 Subrack Power Cable

The subrack power cable connects the power distribution box at the cabinet top and
the PIU board on the subrack, leading the 48 V power supply from the top of the
cabinet to subrack. This cable is installed before delivery.
1. Structure
The structure of the subrack power cable is shown in Figure 10-8.
1. Cable connector
2. Main tag
3. Cable tie
4. Tag
5. Common connector
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the subrack power cable is shown in Table 10-4.
Table 10-4 Pin assignment of subrack power cable
Cable connector
Bare connector
Relation
Core color
X1.A1
X2
A1 connects to X2
Blue (48 V power)
X1.A3
X3
A3 connects to X3
Black (power ground)
10-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Parameter
Cable connector X1
Cable connector-D type-3PIN-female
Naked connector X2/X3
Single cord end terminal-4 mm2-20A-insertion depth

10mm-gray
Cable
Model
Power cable-600 V-0 mm2-12AWG-balck (the core is

blue and black)-41A
Number of
cores
Fireproof level
CM
Color
Blue or black
Length
2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm
10.2.4 Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding Cable

The 48 V/60 V power cable and grounding cable connects 48 V/60 V power
supply to the PIU board of the OptiX OSN 1500 to access 48 V/60 V power to the
equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable is shown in Figure 10-9 and that of the
PGND grounding cable is shown in Figure 10-10.
A3
A2
A1
Figure 10-9 Structure of the 48 V/60 V power cable
10-9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Bare connector-OT type

5. Main tag
2. Cable tie
6. Wire
3. Bare connector
7. Heat-shrink tube
4. Heat-shrink tube
Figure 10-10 Structure of the PGND power cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable is shown in Table 10-5.
Table 10-5 Pin assignment of the 48 V/60 V power cable
Cable connector
Cable
Core color
A1
W1
Blue (48 V/60 power)
A3
W2
Cable connector
48 V/60 V power cable
PGND grounding cable
Cable connector-D
type-3PIN-female
Bare
connector-OT-6mm2-M4-tin
plating-round insulated
conennctor-12 to 10AWG
Bare
connector-OT-6mm2-M8-tin
plating-round insulated
conennctor-12 to 10AWG
10-10
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Cable
48 V/60 V power cable
PGND grounding cable
Model
Wire-300
V-16AWG-black(the core is
blue and black)-13A
Wire-600
V-0mm2-10AWG-yellow/green50A
Number of
cores
Fireproof
level
CM
CM
Color
Blue and black
Yellow and green
Length
15 m, 30 m
15 m, 30 m
10.2.5 HUB/COA Power Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500 PIU board can supply power to external equipment (such
as COA or HUB). The HUB/COA power cable connects power port on the PIU and
the power port of external equipment.
Both ends of the HUB/COA power cable use 4PIN connector, with one end
connected to the PIU board and the other end to the power port of external
equipment (HUB or COA).
1. Structure
The structure of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Figure 10-11.

1
A-A
W1
3 1
4 2
X1
A 2
X3
W2
X2
W1.1
W1
W1.2
W2.1
X3
W2
W2.2
1. Common connector-female
A-A. Sectional view in A direction
2. Plug-4PIN
Figure 10-11 Structure of the HUB/COA power cable
10-11
3. Main tag
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the HUB/COA power cable is shown in Table 10-6.
Table 10-6 Pin assignment of the HUB power cable
Connector X1, X2
Cable W1, W2
Color
Connector X3
X1.1
W1.1
Brown
X3.1
X2.1
W2.1
X1.3
W1.2
Black
X3.3
X2.3
W2.2
Item
Description
Connector X3
Common plug-4 PIN-double rows/4.20 mm
Connector X1/X2
Common terminal-female-4PIN-18/26AWG-13.7 mm in length
W1/W2 cable model
Twisted pair-0-UL2464-0.64mm-22AWG-1 pair-black
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Color
Black
Length
1800 mm
10.2.6 UPM Power Cable

1. Structure
The structure of the power cable connecting UPM to the OptiX OSN 2500/1500 is
shown in Figure 10-12.
A
A1
A2
A3
X2
X1
10-12
B
1
2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the UPM power cable is shown in Table 10-7.
Table 10-7 Pin assignment of the UPM power cable
Cable
connector X1
Cable
Cable connector X2
Core color
A1
W1
Blue (48 V/60 V

power)
A3
W2
Item
Parameter
Cable connector X1
Cable connector-D-spin-female (2 female, 1 male)
Common connector X2
Common terminal-2PIN-single row
Cable
Model
Power cable-300 V-1.31 mm2-16AWG-black (the core is

blue and black)-13A
Number of
cores
Fireproof level
CM
Color
The color of the core is blue or black
Length
2500 mm
10-13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
10.3 Alarm Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cables are listed in:
Table 10-8 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 alarm cable
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
Cabinet indicator cable
Cabinet indicator cable
Indicator/Alarm
concatenating cable between
OSN subracks
Indicator/Alarm concatenating
cable between OSN subracks
Alarm concatenating cable

between OSN subrack and
other subrack
Alarm concatenating cable

between OSN subrack and
other subrack
Housekeeping alarm
input/output cable
Housekeeping alarm
input/output cable
Housekeeping alarm
input/output cable
10.3.1 Cabinet Indicator Cable

The cabinet indicator cable is used to connect the AUX board on the subrack to the
cabinet indicator, leading out the indicator signal from the AUX to the cabinet
indicator.
1. Structure
The structure of the cabinet indicator is shown in Figure 10-13.
B-B. Sectional view in B direction
Figure 10-13 Structure of the cabinet indicator cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable is shown in Table 10-9.
10-14
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Table 10-9 Pin assignment of the cabinet indicator cable
Connector X1
Connector
X2,/X3/ X4/ X5
Color
Relationship
Function
Label
print
X1.4
X2.2
White
Pair
Critical
alarm
Green
X1.5
X2.1
Green
X1.1
X3.2
White
X1.2
X3.1
Blue
X1.3
X4.2
White
X1.6
X4.1
Brown
X1.7
X5.2
White
X1.8
X5.1
Orange
Ground
Pair
Major
alarm
Red
ground
Pair
Power
indicator
Orange
ground
Pair
Minor
alarm
Yellow
Ground
Item
Description
Connector X1
Network interface connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model

connector
Connector
X2/X3/X4/X5
Common connector -2PIN-single row/2.5 mm
Cable model
Twisted pair cable-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Core diameter
0.5 mm
Length
2500 mm, 3000 mm, 3500 mm
10.3.2 Indicator/Alarm Concatenating Cables between OSN Subracks

The indicator/alarm concatenating cables between subracks respectively
concatenates indicator and alarm signals of the OSN subracks in one cabinet or
different cabinet. Both ends of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, with one end
connected to LAMP1 or ALMO2 interface of one subrack and the other end to
LAMP2 or ALMO1 interface of another subrack.
10-15
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Structure
The structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks is

shown in Figure 10-14.
1. Network port
connector RJ-45
2. Tag 1
3. Main tag
A-A. Sectional view in A

direction
Figure 10-14 Structure of the indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN subracks
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN

subracks is shown in Table 10-10.
Table 10-10 Pin assignment of indicator/alarm concatenating cables between OSN subracks
Connector
X1
Connector
X2
Relationship
Alarm output
Indicator
function
X1.1
X2.1
Pair
EMERGENCY ALARM +
YALMP
X1.2
X2.2
EMERGENCY ALARM -
YALMN
X1.3
X2.3
MAIN ALARM +
GRUNP
X1.6
X2.6
MAIN ALARM -
GRUNN
X1.4
X2.4
AUXILIARY ALARM 1+
RALMP
X1.5
X2.5
AUXILIARY ALARM 1-
RALMN
X1.7
X2.7
AUXILIARY ALARM 2+
WALMP
X1.8
X2.8
AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
WALMN
Pair
Pair
Pair
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2

connector
Cable model
Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
Number of cores
10-16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Description
Fireproof level
CM
Core diameter
0.5 mm
Length
3 m, 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.3 Alarm Concatenating Cable between OSN Subrack and Other Subrack
The alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack is used to
concatenate the signals output/input from/to the OptiX OSN equipment and non
OSN series transmission equipment (such as OptiX 2500+, OptiX OSN 9500) of
Huawei. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to ALMO1 or
ALMO2 interface of the subrack and the other end to the alarm output or alarm
concatenating interface of other equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other
subrack is shown in Figure 10-15.
1. Network port
connector - RJ45
L: 5 m, 10 m, 20 m
2. Main tag
3. Tag 1
4. Cable connector-D type 9

PINs-female
Figure 10-15 Alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and
other subrack is shown in Table 10-11.
10-17
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Table 10-11 Pin assignment of alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and other subrack
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Relationship
X1.1
X2.7
Pair
EMERGENCY ALARM +
X1.2
X2.3
X1.3
X2.6
X1.6
X2.1
X1.4
X2.8
X1.5
X2.4
X1.7
X2.9
X1.8
X2.5
EMERGENCY ALARM Pair
MAIN ALARM +
MAIN ALARM -
Pair
AUXILIARY ALARM 1+
AUXILIARY ALARM 1-
Pair
AUXILIARY ALARM 2+
AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
Item
Description
Connector X1

connector
ConnectorX2
Cable connector-D type-9PIN-female
Cable model
Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Core diameter
0.5 mm
Length
5 m, 10 m, 20 m
10.3.4 Housekeeping Alarm Input/Output Cable

The housekeeping alarm input cable inputs the alarm signal of the external
equipment into the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and the output cable outputs the
alarm signal of the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 to the centralized alarm monitoring
equipment.
One end of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable connects to the
housekeeping alarm input/output interface through an RJ-45 connector and the other
end connects to the external equipment or the centralized alarm monitoring
equipment. Make the connector following the on-site requirements. Each cable can
provide 4 channels transmission for housekeeping alarm.
10-18
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Structure
The structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable is shown in Figure 10-16.
1. Network port connector RJ-45
2. Main tag
Figure 10-16 Structure of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable
2. Pin Assignment
OptiX OSN 3500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 16 inputs and 4
outputs.
OptiX OSN 2500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for 8 inputs and 4
outputs.
OptiX OSN 1500 provide house-keeping alarm interface for three inputs and one
output.
So the pin assignment of the housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN
3500/2500 is shown in Table 10-12 and that for OptiX OSN 1500 is shown in Table
10-13.
Table 10-12 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 3500/2500
Connector
X1
Color
Relationship
Alarm output
Alarm input
X1.1
Blue
Pair
EMERGENCY
ALARM +
SW_INPUT 1+
X1.2
White
EMERGENCY
ALARM -
SW_INPUT 1-
X1.3
Orange
MAIN ALARM +
SW_INPUT 2+
X1.6
White
MAIN ALARM -
SW_INPUT 2-
X1.4
Green
AUXILIARY ALARM
1+
SW_INPUT 3+
X1.5
White
AUXILIARY ALARM 1-
SW_INPUT 3-
Pair
Pair
10-19
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Connector
X1
Color
Relationship
Alarm output
Alarm input
X1.7
Brown
Pair
AUXILIARY ALARM
2+
SW_INPUT 4+
X1.8
White
AUXILIARY ALARM 2-
SW_INPUT 4-
Table 10-13 Pin assignment of housekeeping alarm input/output cable for OptiX OSN 1500
Connector
X1
Color
Relationship
Alarm output
Alarm input
X1.1
Blue
Pair
SW_INPUT 1+
X1.2
White
SW_INPUT 1-
X1.3
Orange
SW_INPUT 2+
X1.6
White
SW_INPUT 2-
X1.4
Green
SW_INPUT 3+
X1.5
White
SW_INPUT 3-
X1.7
Brown
SW_OUT1+
X1.8
White
SW_OUT1-
Pair
Pair
Pair
Item
Description
ConnectorX1

connector
Cable model
OptiX OSN 3500/2500: Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5

mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE 430U
OptiX OSN 1500: Twisted pair-10015 -shielded CAT5E
SFTP-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE445U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Core diameter
OptiX OSN 3500/2500: 0.5 mm

OptiX OSN 1500: 0mm
Length
10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10-20
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
10.4 Management Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables are listed in Table 10-14.
Table 10-14 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 management cables
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
OAM serial port cable
Serial14/F&f serial port

cable

cable

cable
RS-232/422 serial port

cable
RS-232/422 serial port

cable
RS-232/422 serial port cable
Ordinary telephone wire
COA concatenating cable
COA concatenating
cable
COA concatenating cable
Straight through cable
Crossover cable
Crossover cable
Crossover cable
10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable

The OAM serial port cable is used for management and remote maintenance of the
OptiX OSN 3500. One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the
OAM interface. The other end uses DB25 connector, connected to the laptop
computer, serial NM or modem.
1. Structure
The structure of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-17

2. Main tag
3. Cable connector-DB25 male
Figure 10-17 Structure of the OAM serial port cable
10-21
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the OAM serial port cable is shown in Table 10-15.
Table 10-15 Pin assignment of OAM serial port cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Function
X1.2
X2.20
Single
DTR (Data Terminal Ready)
X1.3
X2.2
Single
TD (Transmit Data)
X1.6
X2.3
Single
RD (Receive Data)
X1.4
X2.7
Pair
SG (Signaling Ground)
X1.5
Item
Description
Connector X1

connector
ConnectorX2
Cable connector-D type-25PIN-male
Cable model
Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
5000 mm
10.4.2 Serial 14/F&f Cable

The serial 1~4/F&f cable is used for:
transparent transmission of environment detection data signal
management of external devices like COA
management of the UPM
One end of the cable uses RJ-45 connector, connected to serial 14 interfaces or
F&f serial interface, and the other end uses DB9 connector, connected to external
detection equipment or external equipment.
1. Structure
The structure of the Serial 1S4/F&f cable is shown in Figure 10-18.
10-22
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables

2. Main tag
Figure 10-18 Structure of the serial 14/F&f cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the Serial 14/F&f cable is shown in Table 10-16.
Table 10-16 Pin assignment of the serial 14/F&f cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
X1.1
X2.8
X1.2
X2.9
X1.3
X2.6
X1.6
X2.7
X1.4
X2.3
X1.8
X2.2
X1.5
X2.5
Relationship
Pair
Pair
Pair
Single
Function
RS-422TX +
RS-422TX RS-422RX +
RS-422RX RS-232RX
RS-232TX
SG
Item
Description
Connector X1

connector
ConnectorX2
Cable model
(1) Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8 cores-PANTONE

430U
(2) Twisted pair-100 -SEYVP-0.48 mm-26AWG-8 cores-black
10-23
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Description
Number of
cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
Cable (2) is 3 m and cable (1) is 15 m
10.4.3 RS-232/422 Serial Port Cable

The RS-232/422 serial port cable is used to transmission management signaling
between different subnets. Both ends use RJ45 connector. One end is connected to
the RS-232/422 serial port, and the other end to the RS-232/422 serial port of other
NE.
1. Structure
The structure of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-19.

2. Main tag
Figure 10-19 Structure of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the RS232/422 serial port cable is shown in Table 10-17.
10-24
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Table 10-17 Pin assignment of the RS-232/422 serial port cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Relationship
Function
X1.3
X2.1
Pair
RX +
X1.6
X2.2
X1.1
X2.3
X1.2
X2.6
X1.5
X2.5
X1.4
X2.8
X1.8
X2.4
RX Pair
TX +
TX -
Pair
SG
232RX
Single
232TX
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2

connector
Model
Twisted pair-120 -SEYVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
15 m
10.4.4 Orderwire Telephone Wire

The telephone wire is used to connect the orderwire phone. Both ends use RJ-11
connector. One end is connected to the PHONE interface and the other end to the
interface of the orderwire phone.
1. Structure
The structure of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Figure 10-20.
1. Phone connector-RJ-11crystal plug
2. Main tag
Figure 10-20 Structure of ordinary telephone wire
10-25
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the ordinary telephone wire is shown in Table 10-18.
Table 10-18 Pin assignment of ordinary telephone wire
Connector X1
Connector X2
Function
X1.1
X2.1
No connected
X1.2
X2.2
No connected
X1.3
X2.3
TIP
X1.4
X2.4
RING
X1.5
X2.5
No connected
X1.6
X2.6
No connected
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-6PIN-26 to 28AWG
Cable model
Power cable-150 V-UL20251-0.08 mm2-28AWG-black-1A-2-core

telephone wire
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
15 m
10.4.5 COA Concatenating Cable

When multiple COAs are installed in the cabinet, the RS-232/422 serial port is
required to concatenate them. Both ends of the cable use DB9 connector, connected
to the RS232-1 serial port of one COA and the RS232-2 serial port of another COA.
1. Structure
The structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Figure 10-21.
10-26
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Main tag
Figure 10-21 Structure of the COA concatenating serial port cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable is shown in Table
10-19.
Table 10-19 pin assignment of the COA concatenating serial port cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Remark
A pair
Grounding
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Cable model
Twisted pair-100 ohm-UL2464-0.32 mm-28AWG-2P-grey
Number of cores
2 pairs
Fireproof level
CM
Length
0.6 m, 2.5 m
10.4.6 Straight Through Cable

The straight through cable is used in many ways, including:
Connect the OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 and HUB.
Connect HUB and NM computer
Connect the Ethernet interface board and Ethernet equipment

10-27
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Both ends of the straight through cable use RJ-45 connector which connects the
equipment at two ends respectively.
1. Structure
The structure of the straight through cable is shown in Figure 10-22.
2. Tag 1
3. Main tag
4. Tag 2
Figure 10-22 Structure of straight through cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the straight through cable is shown in Table 10-20.
Table 10-20 Pin assignment of the straight through cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.2
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.1
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.6
X2.6
Green
X1.3
X2.3
White/Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
Pair
Pair
Pair
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-crystal model

connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable
10-28
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Description
Cable model
Communication cable-10015 -CAT5E-SFTP 24AWG-8

cores-PANTONE 445U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m
10.4.7 Crossover Cable

The crossover cable is used to connect the NM computer to the OptiX OSN
3500/2500/1500. Both ends of the cable use RJ-45 connector. One end is connected
to the ETH interface, and the other end to the network port of the compute.
1. Structure
The structure of the crossover cable is shown in Figure 10-23.
2. Tag 1
3. Main tag
4. Network cable
5. Tag 2
Figure 10-23 Structure of the crossover cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the crossover cable is shown in Table 10-21.

Table 10-21 Pin assignment of crossover cable
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.6
X2.2
Orange
Pair
X1.3
X2.1
White/Orange
X1.2
X2.6
Green
X1.1
X2.3
White/Green
X1.4
X2.4
Blue
X1.5
X2.5
White/Blue
10-29
Pair
Pair
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Connector X1
Connector X2
Color
Relationship
X1.8
X2.8
Brown
Pair
X1.7
X2.7
White/Brown
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Network interface connector-crystal model

connector-8PIN-8bit-shielded-24 to 26AWG-CAT 6/used with
SFTP network cable
Model
Communication cable-10015-CAT5E-SFTP-24AWG-8 cores

PANTONE 646U
Number of cores
Fireproof level
CM
Length
5 m, 30 m
10-30
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
10.5 Signal Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables are listed in Table 10-22.
Table 10-22 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 signal cables
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
75 E1 cable
75 E1 cable
75 E1 cable
120 E1 cable
120 E1 cable
120 E1 cable
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
Extended subrack service

connection cable
10.5.1 75 8xE1 Cable

The 75 8xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on
the D75S interface board. One end uses DB44 connector, connected to the 75 E1
interface board. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs to be
made as required. Each cable can transmit eight E1 signals.
1. Structure
The structure of the 75 8xE1 cable is shown in Figure 10-24.
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

3. Tag 3, marked: W2 (E1:5 to 8)
2. Tag 1, marked: W1 (E1:1 to 4)

4. Main tag
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 75 8xE1 cable is shown in Table 10-23.
10-31
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
PIN of
DB44
Cable W1
Core
Series
NO.
Remark
PIN of
DB44
Cable W2
Core
Series
NO.
38
Ring
R1
34
Ring
23
Tip
19
Tip
37
Ring
33
Ring
22
Tip
18
Tip
36
Ring
32
Ring
21
Tip
17
Tip
35
Ring
31
Ring
20
Tip
16
Tip
15
Ring
11
Ring
30
Tip
26
Tip
14
Ring
10
Ring
29
Tip
25
Tip
13
Ring
Ring
28
Tip
24
Tip
12
Ring
Ring
27
Tip
Tip
Shell
Out braid of whole cable & ring

of each coax
Shell
Out braid of whole cable &

ring of each coax
R2
R3
R4
T1
T2
T3
T4
Remark
R5
R6
R7
R8
T5
T6
T7
T8
Item
Description
Connector X
Cable model
(W1/W2)
Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x8(A)-75 ohm-9.65 mm-1.2

mm-0.252 mm-white
Fireproof level
CM
Number of cores
8 x E1
Diameter
cover diameter 9.65mm-insulation diameter 1.2mm-conductor

diameter 0.252mm
Length
3 m, 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
10-32
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Caution:
The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable.
Be sure not to discard it before installation
10.5.2 75 16xE1 Cable

The 75 16xE1 cable, used to input/output E1 signal, connects to the interface on
the L75S interface board. One end uses 2 mm HM connector, connected to the 75
E1 interface board L75S. The other end is connected to DDF. The connector needs
to be made as required. Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
1. Structure
1. Cable connector
2. Terminal
2. Pin Assignment

Plug X
Cable W
Core
a1
Tip
a2
Ring
Series
No.
Remark
R1
Plug X
Core
a10
Tip
a11
Ring
10-33
Cable W
Series
No.
Remark
17
R9
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Plug X
10 Cables
Cable W
Core
a3
Tip
a4
Ring
a6
Tip
a7
Ring
a8
Tip
a9
Ring
b1
Tip
b2
Ring
b3
Tip
b4
Ring
b6
Tip
b7
Ring
b8
Tip
b9
Ring
c1
Tip
c2
Ring
c3
Tip
c4
Ring
c6
Tip
c7
Ring
c8
Tip
a9
Ring
d1
Tip
d2
Ring
d3
Tip
d4
Ring
d6
Tip
d7
Ring
Series
No.
Remark
T1
R2
T2
R3
T3
R4
T4
R5
10
T5
11
R6
12
T6
13
R7
14
T7
15
R8
Plug X
Core
a12
Tip
a13
Ring
a15
Tip
a16
Ring
a17
Tip
a18
Ring
b10
Tip
b11
Ring
b12
Tip
b13
Ring
b15
Tip
b16
Ring
b17
Tip
b18
Ring
c10
Tip
c11
Ring
c12
Tip
c13
Ring
c15
Tip
c16
Ring
c17
Tip
c18
Ring
d10
Tip
d11
Ring
d12
Tip
d13
Ring
d15
Tip
d16
Ring
10-34
Cable W
Series
No.
Remark
18
T9
19
R10
20
T10
21
R11
22
T11
23
R12
24
T12
25
R13
26
T13
27
R14
28
T14
29
R15
30
T15
31
R16
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Plug X
10 Cables
Cable W
Core
d8
Tip
d9
Ring
Series
No.
Remark
16
T8
Plug X
Cable W
Core
d17
Tip
d18
Ring
Series
No.
Remark
32
T16
Item
Description
Connector X
2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN-28-30AWG-press-fit
Cable model (W1/W2)
Coaxial cable-SYFVZP-75-1-1x32(A)-75 ohm-18

mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm-Huawei gray
Fireproof level
CM
Number of cores
16 x E1
Cover diameter-insulation
diameter-conductor
diameter
18 mm-1.2 mm-0.254 mm
Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
Caution:
The pin assignment table of the E1 cable is put in one packing case with the cable.
Be sure not to discard it before installation
10.5.3 120 8xE1 Cable

The 120 8 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses DB44
connector, connected to 120 E1 electrical interface board D12S. The other end is
connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required. Each cable can
transmit eight E1 signals.
1. Structure
10-35
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Cable connector-D type-44PIN-male

3. Tag 3, marked"W2 (RX18)"
2. Tag 1, marked:"W1 (TX18)"

4. Main tag
Figure 10-26 Structure of the 120 8 x E1 cable
2. Pin Assignment
Table 10-25 Pin assignment of the 120 8 x E1 cable
PIN of
DB44
Cable W1
Core
Series
NO.
15
Blue
30
White
14
Orange
29
White
13
Green
28
White
12
Brown
27
White
11
Grey
26
White
10
Blue
25
Red
Orange
24
Red
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Pair
Remark
Tx1
Tx2
Tx3
Tx4
Tx5
Tx6
Tx7
PIN of
DB44
Cable W2
Core
38
Blue
23
White
37
Orange
22
White
36
Green
21
White
35
Brown
20
White
34
Grey
19
White
33
Blue
18
Red
32
Orange
17
Red
10-36
Remark
Series
NO.
Pair
Rx1
Pair
Rx2
Pair
Rx3
Pair
Rx4
Pair
Rx5
Pair
Rx6
Pair
Rx7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
PIN of
DB44
Cable W1
Core
Series
NO.
Green
7
Shell
Remark
PIN of
DB44
Cable W2
Core
31
Green
Red
16
Red
Out braid of whole cable
Shell
Out braid of whole cable
Pair
Tx8
Remark
Series
NO.
Pair
Rx8
Item
Description
Connector X
Cable model
Communication cable-120 -SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-16

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
16
Inner conductor
diameter
0.5 mm
Fireproof level
CM
Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m
10.5.4 120 16xE1 Cable

The 120 16 x E1 cable is used to input/output E1 signals. One end uses 2 mm HM
connector, connected to the 120 E1 electrical interface board L12S or PL1B. The
other end is connected to the DDF. The connector needs to be made as required.
Each cable can transmit 16 E1 signals.
1. Structure

3
W2
W1
1. Cable connector
2. Terminal
10-37
3. Main tag
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
2. Pin Assignment
Plug X
Cable W1
Core
a1
Blue
a2
White
a6
Orange
a7
White
b1
Green
b2
White
b6
Brown
b7
White
c1
Grey
c2
White
c6
Blue
c7
Red
d1
Orange
d2
Red
d6
Green
d7
Red
a10
Brown
a11
Red
a15
Grey
a16
Red
b10
Blue
b11
Black
b15
Orange
b16
Black
c10
Green
c11
Black
Series
NO.
Remark
Pair
R1
Pair
R2
Pair
R3
Pair
R4
Pair
R5
Pair
R6
Pair
R7
Pair
R8
Pair
R9
Pair
R10
Pair
R11
Pair
R12
Pair
R13
Plug X
Core
a3
Blue
a4
White
a8
Orange
a9
White
b3
Green
b4
White
b8
Brown
b9
White
c3
Grey
c4
White
c8
Blue
c9
Red
d3
Orange
d4
Red
d8
Green
d9
Red
a12
Brown
a13
Red
a17
Grey
a18
Red
b12
Blue
b13
Black
b17
Orange
b18
Black
c12
Green
c13
Black
10-38
Cable W2
Series
NO.
Remark
Pair
T1
Pair
T2
Pair
T3
Pair
T4
Pair
T5
Pair
T6
Pair
T7
Pair
T8
Pair
T9
Pair
T10
Pair
T11
Pair
T12
Pair
T13
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Plug X
10 Cables
Cable W1
Core
c15
Brown
c16
Black
d10
Grey
d11
Black
d15
Blue
d16
Yellow
a5
shield
Series
NO.
Remark
Pair
R14
Pair
R15
Pair
R16
PGND
Plug X
Cable W2
Core
c17
Brown
c18
Black
d12
Grey
d13
Black
d17
Blue
d18
Yellow
a14
shield
Series
NO.
Remark
Pair
T14
Pair
T15
Pair
T16
PGND
Item
Description
Connector X
2 mm HM cable connector-4x18PIN24-26AWG-press-fit
Cable model
W1/W2
Symmetrical twisted pair-120 -SEYPVPV-0.5 mm-24AWG-32

cores-PANTONE 430U
Number of cores
32
Inner conductor
diameter
0.5 mm
Fireproof level
CM
Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m
10.5.5 E3/DS3/STM-1 Cable

The E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is used to input/output E3/DS3/STM-1 signal. One end
uses SMB connector, connected to the E3/DS3/STM-1 interface board. The other
end is connected to the DDF, and the connector needs to be made as required.
1. Structure
The structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable is shown in Figure 10-28.
10-39
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Coaxial connector-SMB
2. Main tag
3. Coaxial cable
Figure 10-28 Structure of the E3/DS3/STM-1 cable
2. Pin Assignment
None
Item
Description
Connector
Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight and female
Cable I
Cable II
Cable III
Cable IV
Model
Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1 mm-0.34 mm-shielded
Diameter
cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

mm-conductor diameter 0.34 mm
Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Model
Coaxial cable-75 ohm-4.4 mm-2.4 mm-0.4

mm-shielded-grey
Diameter

Length
15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m
Model
Coaxial cable-75ohm-6.7mm-3.8mm-0.61mm-shielded-grey
Diameter

Length
15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Model
Coaxial cable-75 ohm-5.80 mm-3.71 mm-0.643 mm-black
Diameter

Length
30 m
Fireproof level
CM
10-40
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
10.5.6 Extended Subrack Service Connection Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500 supports extended subrack, adding/dropping up to 504 x E1
services. The extended subrack service connection cable is used to connect the
service between main subrack and extended subrack in one cabinet. One end of the
cable is connected to the EXA/EXB interface of the UXCSB board of the main
subrack and the other end to the EXA/EXB interface of the XCE board.
1. Structure
The structure of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in Figure
10-29.
2
X1
1. PIN#1
X2
2. PIN#26
Figure 10-29 Structure of the extended subrack service connection cable
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable is shown in
Table 10-27.
10-41
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Table 10-27 Pin assignment of the extended subrack service connection cable
Pin
Core and serial number
Core
14
2
Ground
15
Core
3
16
Ground
Core
17
5
Ground
18
Core
6
19
Ground
Core
21
8
Ground
23
Core
10
22
Ground
12
Core
24
11
Ground
26
Core
13
25
Ground
Core
20
X1/X2 enclosure
Ground
10-42
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
Description
Connector X1/X2
Cable Connector-1.27mm mini D type-26PIN

male-LVDS,28AWG or 30AWG
Cable model
Communication Cable-100-UL20379-30AWG-8P+1P-grey
Number of cores
8P+1P
Fireproof level
CM
Length
5m
10.6 Clock Cable

The OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables are listed in Table 10-28.
Table 10-28 OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 clock cables
OptiX OSN 3500
OptiX OSN 2500
OptiX OSN 1500
75 clock cable
75 clock cable
75 clock cable
120 clock cable
120 clock cable
120 clock cable
1/2-channel clock transfer

cable
1/2-channel clock
transfer cable
1/2-channel clock transfer

cable
10.6.1 Clock Cable

The clock cable includes 75 clock cable and 120 clock cable, used for
inputting/outputting external clock signal.
For the 75 clock cable, one end uses SMB connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required
For the 120 clock cable, one end uses RJ-45 connector, connected to the external
clock interface of the AUX board. The other end is connected to external clock
equipment and the connector needs to be made as required. The 120 clock cable
can input/output two clock signals.
1. Structure
The structure of the 75 and 120 clock cables is respectively shown in Figure
10-30 and Figure 10-31.
10-43
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Coaxial connector -SMB
2. Tag
1. Tag 1 (R) and Tag2 (T) 2. Communication cable

4. Network port connector-RJ-45
3. Main tag
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 120 clock cable is shown in Table 10-29.
Table 10-29 Pin assignment of the 120 clock cable
X1
Remark
X1.1
Blue
W1
X1.2
White
X1.4
Orange
X1.5
White
10-44
W2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
75
clock
cable
120
clock
cable
Description
Connector
Cable
Model
Coaxial cable-75 ohm-3.9 mm-2.1mm-0.34

mm-shielded
Diameter

Length
10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Connector X1
Network interface
cable-8PIN-8bit-shielded-crystal model connector
Cable
Model
Twisted pair-120 ohm-SEYPVPV-0.4

mm-26AWG-2 pairs-Pantone 430U
Conductor
diameter
0.4 mm/26AWG
Length
5 m, 10 m, 20 m, 30 m, 40 m, 50 m, 70 m, 100 m
10.6.2 1/2-Channel Clock Transfer Cable

The clock transfer cable includes 1-channel and 2-channel 75 /120 clock cables.
1. Structure
The structure of 1-channel and 2-channel 75 /120 clock transfer cables is shown
in Figure 10-32 and Figure 10-33 respectively.
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight/plug-female

3. 75 /120 transfer PCB
2. Main tag
10-45
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
1. Coaxial connector-SMB-75 -straight/plug-female

5. 75 /120 transfer PCB
2. Tag 1:1#
6. Tag 3:1#
3. Tag 2:2#
7. Tag 4:2#
4. Main tag
2. Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of the 2-channel 120 /75 clock transfer cable is shown in
Table 10-30.
Table 10-30 Pin assignment of the 75 /120 clock transfer cable
Connector
75 cable
Color
120 cable
X1
Core
Blue
W3
Shielding layer
White
Core
Blue
Shielding layer
White
X2
W4
Item
1-channel
Description
Connector
75
cable
Model

mm-shielded
Diameter
Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

Model

Conductor
diameter
0.4 mm/26AWG
120
cable
Length
30 m
10-46
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

10 Cables
Item
2-channel
Description
X1/X2 connector
75
cable
Model

mm-shielded
Diameter
Cover diameter 3.9 mm-insulation diameter 2.1

Model

Conductor
diameter
0.4 mm/26AWG
120
cable
Length
30 m
10-47
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

A Indicator Description for

Equipment and Board
Indicator Description for

Equipment and Board
A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description

Indicator
Status
Description
Power indicator Green
On
The cabinet is powered on.
Off
The cabinet is not powered on.
On
There is a critical alarm.
Off
There is no critical alarm.
On
There is a major alarm.
Off
There is no major alarm.
On
There is a minor alarm.
Off
There is no minor alarm.
Critical alarm indicator Red
Major alarm indicator Orange
Minor alarm indicator Yellow

A-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Equipment and Board
A.2 Board Indicator Description

1. Board Hardware Indicator - STAT
Status
Description
On, green
On, red
Off
The board is not powered on, or no service is configured.
2. Service Activation Indicator - ACT

Status
Description
On, green
The service is activated, and the board is in service.
Off
The board is not activated.
3. Board Software Indicator - PROG

Status
Description
On, green
The board software or software for FPGA is uploaded

successfully, or the board software is initialized
successfully.

The board software or software for FPGA is being

uploaded.

The board software is being initialized, and is in BIOS

boot stage.
On, red
The board software or software for FPGA is lost, or failed

in uploading or in initializing.
Off
No power supply.
4. Service Alarm Indicator - SRV

Status
Description
On, green
Service is normal, no service alarm occurs.
On, red
Critical or major alarm occurs to service.
On, yellow
Minor or remote alarm occurs to service.
Off
No service is configured or no power is fed.

A-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500


Equipment and Board
5. Power Monitoring Indicators and Alarm Cut Indicator of the SCC

Indicator name
Status
Description
Indicator for 48 V
power supply A
(PWRA)
On, green
The 48 V power supply A is normal.
On, red, or off
The 48 V power supply A is faulty (lost or

failed).
Indicator for 48 V
power supply B
(PWRB)
On, green
The 48 V power supply B is normal.
On, red, or off
The 48 V power supply B is faulty (lost or

failed).
Indicator for +3.3 V

power supply C
(PWRC)
On, green
The +3.3 V protection power is normal.
On, red
The +3.3 V protection power is lost.
Alarm cut indicator

(ALMC)
On, yellow
Currently in permanent alarm cut-off status.
Off
Give sound warning upon alarm.
6. Ethernet Indicators of the SCC and AUX

Indicator name
Status
Description
LINK indicator
(Green)
On
Link between network cable and equipment is

established.
Off
Link between network cable and equipment is

not established.
On
There is data transmitted/received.
Off
There is no data transmitted/received.
ACT indicator
(Orange)
7. Ethernet Port Indicator of Interface Board

Status
Description
Remark
The green and yellow

indicator is off.
The Ethernet cable is not

connected.
The green indicator is on,

and the yellow indicator
does not flash.
The Ethernet cable is

connected, but no data is
transmitted.
The green indicator is on,

and the yellow indicator
flashes.
The Ethernet cable is

connected, and data is
transmitted.
The flashing frequency of

yellow indicator depends on
the transmission of Ethernet
data.

A-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board Version Description
B.1 Board Version List

The board versions provided by the OptiX OSN 3500, OptiX OSN 2500, and OptiX
OSN 1500 are listed
Equipment
OSN3500
(40Gbit/s)
OSN3500
(80Gbit/s)
OSN2500
REG
OSN2500
OSN1500A
OSN1500B
N2SL64
N1SL16(A)
N2SL16(A)
N1SF16
N1SLQ4
N2SLQ4
N1SLD4
N2SLD4
N1SL4
N2SL4
N1SLT1
N1SLQ1
N2SLQ1
N1SL1
N2SL1
Board

B-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Equipment
OSN3500
(40Gbit/s)

OSN3500
(80Gbit/s)
OSN2500
REG
OSN2500
OSN1500A
OSN1500B
R1SLD4
R1SL4
R1SLQ1
R1SL1
Board
N1SEP1
N1SEP
N1PQ1
R1PD1 A/B
R1PL1 A/B
R1L75S
R1L12S
N1PQM
N1PD3
N1PL3
N1PL3A
N1SPQ4
N2SPQ4
N1D75S
N1D12S
N1D12B
N1D34S
N1C34S
N1MU04
N1EU08
N1OU08
N2OU08
N1TSB8
N1EFS4
N1EFS0

B-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Equipment
OSN3500
(40Gbit/s)
OSN3500
(80Gbit/s)
N2EFS0
N1EGS2
N2EGS2
N1EGT2
N1EFT8
Board
OSN2500
REG
R1EFT4
OSN2500
OSN1500A
OSN1500B
N1EMR0
N2EMR0
N1EGR2
N2EGR2
N1EFF8
N1ETF8
N1ETS8
N1ADL4
N1ADQ1
N1IDL4
N1IDQ1
N1MST4
N1MR2A
N1MR2B
N1MR2C
N1LWX
N1BPA
N1BA2
N1DCU
N1GXCSA
N2GXCSA
N1EXCSA
N1UXCSA

B-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Equipment
OSN3500
(40Gbit/s)

OSN3500
(80Gbit/s)
OSN2500
REG
OSN2500
OSN1500A
OSN1500B
Q1CXL1/4/16
Q2CXL1/4/16
Board
N1UXCSB
N1XCE
N1SCC
N1GSCC
N2GSCC
Q1CRG
N1PIU
Q1PIU
R1PIU
R1PIUA
N1FAN
R1FAN
R1AUX
R2AUX
N1FANA
R1EOW
Q1SAP
Q1SEI
N1AUX
61COA/62COA
TDA
UPM
indicates that the product supports the board.
B.2 Version Description

B.2.1 Optical Line Interface Board
The optical line interface boards of OptiX OSN products all have two versions: N1 and
N2, as described in Table B-1
B-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table B-1 N1 and N2 optical line interface boards
Item
Description
Similarity
The boards of two versions implement the same functions.
Difference
The N2 version supports tandem connection monitoring (TCM), but the

N1 version does not.
NM support
The T2000 distinguishes N1 from N2 directly.
OptiX OSN
product

supports N1 and N2 optical line interface boards.
The optical interface board with single optical interface supports
replacement between N1 and N2. After completion of hardware
replacement, use the direct replacement command on the T2000 to
effectuate the replacement.
Version
replacement
Note:
If an N2 board starts the TCM function before replacement, its replacement
by an N1 board will fail.
Other optical interface boards do not support replacement between N1

and N2.
Note: The optical interface boards with one optical interface refer to SL64, SL16, SF16, SL4
and SL1, which have one pair of optical interface.
B.2.2 Ethernet Processing Board

The Ethernet processing boards of OptiX OSN products can support N1, N2 or R1
versions. For details, refer to Table B-2. The EGT2 and EFT8 are Ethernet transparent
transmission boards, supporting only N1 version currently. The EFT4, an Ethernet
transparent transmission board seated in half-height slot and used on the OptiX OSN
1500 subrack, supports R1. Except EFS4, other Ethernet processing boards with
Layer 2 switching function all support N1 and N2 version.
Table B-2 Ethernet processing board version
Version
N1
N2
R1
EGT2/EFT8
Supported
EFT4
Supported
EFS4
Supported
EFS0/EGS2
Supported
Supported
EMR0/EGR2
Supported
Supported
Board
N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards are described Table B-3.

B-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table B-3 N1 and N2 Ethernet processing boards
Item
Description
Similarity
The working principle and functions of N1 and N2 boards are the same.
Difference
The uplink bandwidth of the N1 board at the SDH side is half that of the N2
board.
The N1 and N2 boards have the same hardware but different software.
NM support
The T2000 differentiates N1 from N2 directly.

V100R001 products only support N1Ethernet processing boards. When
N2 boards are inserted, they are displayed as N1 boards on the T2000
and used as N1 boards.
Product
support

configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2
software.
configure N2 boards manually. The T2000 can upgrade N1 software to N2
software.
For any product version, the board software can be upgraded from N1 to
N2.
Version
replacement
The N1 boards are only used as N1 boards. For V100R002 and

V100R003 products, N2 boards can be used as either N1 boards
(displayed as N1 boards on the T2000) or N2 boards (displayed as N2
boards on the T2000).
When N2 boards are used as N1 boards, the boards can be upgraded to
N2 boards by deleting the original board and adding an N2 board. During
the upgrade, services will be interrupted.

B-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

B.2.3 Cross-Connect and SCC boards

1. GXCSA
The OptiX OSN 3500 GXCSA has N1 and N2 versions, as described in Table B-4
Table B-4 N1 and N2 GXCSA boards
Item
Description
Similarity
Board functions and board software are the same.
Difference
Different FPGA program is uploaded due to different hardware
NM support
The T2000 does not differentiate N1 from N2.
Product
support

supports N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA.
The N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA can be replaced by each other.
Version
replacement
Because the N1 GXCSA and N2 GXCSA use different FPGA program,

select corresponding FPGA program in upgrading. Otherwise, the
upgrading will fail.
2. SCC
The OptiX OSN 3500 SCC supports the following three versions:
N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC, as described in Table B-5.
Table B-5 N1SCC, N1GSCC and N2GSCC
Item
Description
Description
Implement system control and communication functions.

N1SCC: does not support extended subracks or intelligent features
Difference
NM support
Product
support
Version
replacement
N1GSCC: support extended subracks and intelligent

N2GSCC: applicable to the OptiX OSN 7500 and OptiX OSN 3500,
supporting intelligent features.
On the T2000, N1SCC is displayed as SCC, N1GSCC as GSCC,
N2GSCC as GSCC. Specific version number can be distinguished by bar
code on the board front panel.
V100R001 products support N1SCC only.
V100R002 products support N1SCC and N1GSCC.
V100R003 products support all versions.
Compatible with subsequent versions.
3. CXL1/4/16
The CXL1/4/16 has Q1 and Q2 versions, as described in Table B-6.

B-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Table B-6 Q1 and Q2 CXL1/4/16 boards
Item
Description
Similarity
Implement cross-connect, clock, system control and optical line

processing functions.
Difference
NM support
Q1CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 5 Gbit/s lower order

cross-connect capacity.
Q2CXL1/4/16: support 20 Gbit/s higher order and 20 Gbit/slower order
cross-connect capacity, and support intelligent features.
CXL1/4/16 is displayed as three parts on the T2000: system control,
cross-connect and optical line interface.
Q1CXL1/4/16 is displayed as SCC, CXL and Q1SL1/4/16.
Q2CXL1/4/16 is displayed as GSCC, ECXL and Q1SL1/4/16.
Product
support
Version
replacement
V100R001 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 only.

V100R002 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16.
V100R003 products support Q1CXL1/4/16 and Q2CXL1/4/16.
Compatible with subsequent versions.
B.2.4 Other Boards

The OptiX OSN PIU, AUX and FAN also have several versions, as described in Table
B-7.
Table B-7 Version description of PIU, AUX and FAN
Item
Description
PIU
Similarity
Access and distribute 48 V

power
N1PIU: applicable to 3500

Difference
Q1PIU: applicable to 2500
AUX
FAN
Provide auxiliary interfaces

and orderwire processing
functions
Dissipate heat
N1AUX: applicable to the

OptiX OSN 3500
N1FAN: applicable to the

OptiX OSN 3500 and the
OptiX OSN 2500
R1FAN: applicable to
OptiX OSN 1500
R1PIUA: applicable to 1500A
R1AUX and R2AUX:

applicable to the OptiX OSN
1500
NM support
All displayed as PIU on the

T2000.
All displayed as AUX on the

T2000.
All displayed as FAN or

FANA on the T2000.
Version
replacement
Irreplaceable
For V100R003 products,

R1AUX and R2AUX can be
replaced by each other.
Irreplaceable
R1PIU: applicable to 1500B

B-8
N1FANA: used in high

power consumption
occasions
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Power Consumption and Weight
Board
Power
consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board
Power
consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
N2SL64
32
1.12
N1EFS4
30
0.98
N1/N2SL16
20
1.10
N1/N2EFS0
35
0.98
N1SF16
26
1.09
N1/N2EGS2
40/43.2
1.04
N1/N2SLQ4
16
1.04
N1EGT2
23
0.90
N1/N2SLD4
15
1.01
N1EFT8
26
1.01
N1/N2SL4
15
1.00
N1EFT4
14
0.53
N1SLT1
15
1.22
N1/N2EMR0
50
1.20
N1/N2SLQ1
15
1.04
N1/N2EGR2
54
1.10
N1/N2SL1
14
1.00
N1ETF8
0.37
R1SL4
10
0.34
N1EFF8
0.44
R1SLD4
11
0.36
N1ETS8
2.5
0.37
R1SLQ1
12
0.40
N1ADL4
35
0.90
R1SL1
10
0.34
N1ADQ1
37
0.95
N1BA2
20
1.01
N1IDL4
36.6
1.01
N1BPA
20
1.01
N1IDQ1
36.6
1.01
N1DCU
0.42
N1MR2A
1.01
N1SEP1
17
0.95
N1MR2B
1.01
N1EU08
11
0.41
N1MR2C
1.01

C-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Board
Power
consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
Board
Power
consumption (W)
Weight (kg)
N2SL64
32
1.12
N1EFS4
30
0.98
N1/N2OU08
0.41
N1LWX
30
1.10
N1EU04
0.40
N1GXCSA
27
1.81
N1/N2SPQ4
24
0.91
N1EXCSA
62
2.00
N1MU04
0.41
N1UXCS
65
2.00
N1PD3
19
1.12
N1XCE
25
1.50
N1PL3
15
1.00
Q1CXL1/4/16
40
1.12
N1D34S
0.38
Q2CXL1/4/16
40
1.12
N1C34S
0.31
N1SCC
10
0.88
N1PQM
22
1.01
N2GSCC
10
0.88
N1PQ1
19
1.01
Q1CRG
12
0.90
N1D75S
5.5
0.35
N1PIU
1.15
N1D12B
0.31
Q1PIU
1.25
N1D12S
0.35
R1PIU
1.5
1.25
R1PD1
15
0.5
R1PIUA
1.25
R1PL1
0.45
N1FAN (Note
1)
15
1.50
R1L75S
0.27
R1FAN (Note
1)
20
1.01
R1L12S
0.24
R1EOW
10
0.40
N1PL3A
15
1.00
N1AUX
19
0.96
N1TSB8
0.28
N2AUX
19
0.96
61COA
10
3.50
62COA
75
8.00
Note: The value is the power consumption for each fan frame.

C-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

D
Abbreviation
Abbreviations and Acronyms

Full name
A
ADM
Add/Drop Multiplexer
AMI
Alternate Mark Inversion
APS
ATM Protection Switch
ATM
Asynchronous Transfer Mode
B
BITS
Building Integrated Timing Supply
C
CBR
Constant Bit Rate
CC
Continuity Check
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
COA
Case-shaped Optical Amplifier
CPU
Center Processing Unit
CRC
Cyclic Redundancy Check
D
DC
Direct Current
DCC
Data Communication Channel
DCE
Data Circuit-terminal Equipment
DCU
Dispersion Compensation Unit
DDF
Digital Distribution Frame

D-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Abbreviation
Full name
DTR
Data Terminal Ready
DVB-ASI
Digital Video Broadcast-Asynchronous Serial Interface
DWDM
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
E
ECC
Embedded Control Channel
EDFA
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
EMI
ElectroMagnetic Interference
EPL
Ethernet Private Line
EPLAN
Ethernet Private LAN
ESCON
Enterprise Systems Connection
ETS
European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI
European Telecommunications Standards Institute
EVPL
Ethernet Virtual Private Line
EVPLAN
Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
F
FC
Fiber Channel
FE
Fast Ethernet
FICON
Fiber Connection
FPGA
Field Programmable Gate Array
G
GE
Gigabit Ethernet
GFP
Generic Framing Procedure
H
HDB3
High Density Bipolar of order 3 code
HDLC
High level Data Link Control
I
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IS-IS
Intermedia System-Intermedia System
ITU-T
International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunication

Standardization Sector

D-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Abbreviation

Full name
L
LAPS
Link Access Procedure-SDH
LB
LoopBack
LCAS
Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme
LCT
Local Craft Terminal
M
MPLS
Multi-protocol Label Switch
MSP
Multiplex Section Protection
N
NA
Not applicable
NRZ
Non Return to Zero
O
OAM
Operation Administration and Maintenance
OSPF
Open Shortest Path First
P
PA
nylon(polyamide); polyamide bar; Power Amplifier; Project

Accounting; Project Administrator; Protocol Adapter
PDH
Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy
R
RD
Receive Data
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RSTP
Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
S
SG
Signaling Ground
SNCP
Sub-Network Connection Protection
SSM
Synchronization Status Marker
T
TD
Transmit Data
TDA
Tone & Data Access Unit
TPS
Tributary Protection Switching

D-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Abbreviation

Full name
U
UBR
Unspecified Bit Rate
V
VBR
Variable Bit Rate
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
VPN
Virtual Private Network
W
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplexing

D-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
Index
ADL4, 7-34
ADQ1, 7-34
ATM service processing board with IMA function
IDL4, 7-40
IDQ1, 7-40
AUX
communication module, 9-33
interface, 9-36
interface module, 9-33
power module, 9-33
technical parameter, 9-47
AUX board
DIP switch and jumper, 9-46
front panel, 9-36
function, 9-30
principle, 9-33
slots, 9-30
version description, 9-46
Numerics
1:1 TPS protection,for EFS0, 7-17
1:N TPS protection,for E1/T1, 6-26
1:N TPS protection,for E3/DS3, 6-15
1:N TPS protection,for E4/STM-1, 6-5
1:N TPS protection,for STM-1, 5-40
120 E1 cable, 10-35, 10-37
1-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45
2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-45
75 E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33
A
abbreviation, D-1
acronym, D-1
ACT. see service activation indicator
ADL4 board
front panel, 7-36
function, 7-34
indicator, 7-37, 7-42
interface, 7-37
principle, 7-35
protection configuration, 7-38
slots, 7-34
version description, 7-39, 7-44
ADQ1 board
front panel, 7-36
function, 7-34
indicator, 7-37, 7-42
interface, 7-37
principle, 7-35
slots, 7-34
version description, 7-39, 7-44
alarm concatenanting cable between OSN subrack and
other subrack, 10-17
alarm concatenation, 9-44
alarm cut indicator, A-3
architecture,equipment, 1-1
ATM service processing board
B
BA2 board
application, 9-12
front panel, 9-14
function, 9-12
indicator, 9-14
interface, 9-14
principle, 9-13
slots, 9-12
BGND power cable, 10-5
board
appearance, 4-11
classification, 4-1
indicator (summary table), A-2
power consumption (summary table), C-1
weight (summary table), C-1
board classification
cross-connect and SCC boards, 4-7
Data processong boards, 4-5
other boards, 4-9
PDH boards, 4-3
SDH boards, 4-1

i-1
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
board hardware indicator, A-2

board software indicator, A-2
BPA board
application, 9-12
front panel, 9-14
function, 9-12
indicator, 9-14
interface, 9-14
principle, 9-13
slots, 9-12
COA
62COA, 9-16
application, 9-17
front panel, 9-19
function, 9-17
indicator, 9-19
installation, 9-22
interface, 9-20
MONITOR-1/MONITOR-2 interface, 9-21
power interface, 9-22
principle, 9-18
RS-232-1/RS-232-2 serial port, 9-20
technical specification, 9-23
COA concatenating cable, 10-26
connector
E2000/APC, 9-20
CRG board
front panel, 8-24
function, 8-22
indicator, 8-25
interface, 8-26
principle, 8-23
slots, 8-22
switch, 8-24
techincal parameter, 8-26
cross-connect & synchronous timing board
CXL1, 8-9
CXL16, 8-9
CXL4, 8-9
EXCS, 8-2
GXCS, 8-2
UXCS, 8-2
XCE, 8-2
crossover cable, 10-29
CXL1 board
front panel, 8-11
function, 8-9
indicator, 8-11
interface, 8-13
parameter configuration, 8-13
principle, 8-10
CXL1/CXL4/CXL16 board
slots, 8-9
CXL16 board
front panel, 8-11
function, 8-9
indicator, 8-11
interface, 8-13
principle, 8-10
CXL4 board
front panel, 8-11
function, 8-9
indicator, 8-11
interface, 8-13
C
C2. see signal label byte
C34S board
front panel, 6-13
cabinet
configuration, 2-3
ETSI cabinet, 2-1
indicator, 2-3
indicator (summary table), A-1
power distribution unit, 2-4
size, 2-6
type, 2-1
weight, 2-6
cabinet door grounding cable, 10-7
cabinet indicator cable, 10-14
cable technical parameter
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46
48 V cabinet power cable, 10-6
75 E1 cable, 10-32, 10-35
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and
cabinet BGND power cable, 10-6
cabinet door grounding cable, 10-8
cabinet PGND power cable, 10-6
clock cable, 10-45
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-40
extended subrack service connection cable, 10-43
housekeeping alarm input/output cable, 10-20
HUB/COA power cable, 10-12
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN
subracks, 10-16
OAM serial port cable, 10-22
RS-232/422 serial port cable, 10-25
serial 14/f&f cable, 10-23
straight through cable, 10-28
subrack power cable, 10-9, 10-10
telephone wire, 10-26
UPM power cable, 10-13
capacity
cross-connect for OptiX OSN 2500/1500, 8-9
cross-connect for OptiX OSN 3500, 8-2
case-shape optical amplifier
COA, 9-16
clock cable, 10-43

i-2
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
1:1 TPS protection, 7-17
1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 7-19
1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 7-18
1:1 TPS protection for OptiX OSN 3500, 7-17
front panel, 7-15
indicator, 7-16
interface, 7-16
slots, 7-11
EFS0/EFS4/EGS2 board
EFS4 board
front panel, 7-15
function, 7-12
indicator, 7-16
interface, 7-16
principle, 7-14
slots, 7-11
EFS8 board
function, 7-12
principle, 7-14
EFT4 board
front panel, 7-5
function, 7-3
indicator, 7-6
interface, 7-7
principle, 7-4
slots, 7-2
EFT8 board
front panel, 7-5
function, 7-3
indicator, 7-6
interface, 7-7
principle, 7-4
slots, 7-2
EGR2 board
front panel, 7-28
function, 7-24
indicator, 7-29
interface board, 7-30
principle, 7-27
slots, 7-24
EGS2 board
front panel, 7-15
function, 7-12
indicator, 7-16
interface, 7-16
principle, 7-14
slots, 7-11
EGT2 board
front panel, 7-5
function, 7-3
principle, 8-10
D
D12B. see also PQ1
D12S. see also PQ1
D34S. see also PD3
D34S board
front panel, 6-13
slots, 6-11
D75S. see also PQ1
D75S/D12S/D12B board
front panel, 6-24
function, 6-22
slots, 6-22
DCU
application, 9-25
front panel, 9-26
function, 9-25
interface, 9-27
principle, 9-26
DCU board
slots, 9-25
dispersion compensation board
DCU, 9-25
E
E1 interface board
D75S, 6-22
E1 processing board
PQ1, 6-22
E1 processing board (half-slot)
PD1 board, 6-31
PL1 board, 6-31
E1/T1 interface board
D12B, 6-22
D12S, 6-22
E1/T1 processing board
PQM, 6-22
E2000/APC optical interface, 10-4
E3/DS3 interface switching board
D34S, 6-11
E3/DS3 processing board
PD3, 6-11
PL3, 6-11
PL3A, 6-11
E3/DS3/STM-1 cable, 10-39
E4/STM-1 processing board
SPQ4, 6-1
EFF8 board
front panel, 7-5
interface, 7-7
EFF8/ETF8 board
slots, 7-2
EFS0 board

i-3
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
indicator, 7-6
interface, 7-7
principle, 7-4
slots, 7-2
EGT2/EFT8/EFT4 board
ejector lever, 4-11
EMR0 board
front panel, 7-28
function, 7-24
indicator, 7-29
principle, 7-27
slots, 7-24
EOW board
front panel, 9-42
function, 9-30
principle, 9-33
slots, 9-30
Equipment 48 V/60 V Power Cable/PGND Grounding
Cable, 10-9
equipment architecture, 1-1
OptiX OSN 1500A, 1-5
OptiX OSN 1500B, 1-5
OptiX OSN 2500, 1-3
OptiX OSN 3500, 1-1
ETF8 board
front panel, 7-5
interface, 7-7
Ethernet board with RPR function
EGR2, 7-24
EMR0, 7-24
Ethernet electrical interface board
ETF8, 7-2
Ethernet indicator
ACT indicator, A-3
LINK indicator, A-3
Ethernet interface switching board
ETS8, 7-11
Ethernet optical interface board
EFF8, 7-2
Ethernet port indicator, A-3
Ethernet switching processing board
EFS0, 7-11
EFS4, 7-11
EGS2, 7-11
Ethernet transparent transmission board
EFT4, 7-2
EFT8, 7-2
EGT2, 7-2
ETS8 board
front panel, 7-15
indicator, 7-16
interface, 7-16
slots, 7-11
ETSI cabinet
appearance, 2-1
EU08. see also SEP1
EU08 board
front panel, 5-35
interface, 5-36
slots, 5-32
EU08/OU08 board
function, 5-33
EXCS board
front panel, 8-4
EXCS board
function, 8-2
indicator, 8-4
interface, 8-5
principle, 8-3
EXCSA board
F
FAN
function, 9-60
principle, 9-60
FAN board
indicator, 9-61
fan control board
FAN, 9-59
fan tray assembly. see FAN
FC/PC optical interface, 10-4
FE processing board
RPR transmission, 7-24
switching, 7-11
transparent transmission, 7-2
fiber jumper. see tail fiber
G
GE processing board
RPR transmission, 7-24
switching, 7-11
transparent transmission, 7-2
GSCC board
front panel, 8-18
slots, 8-16
GXCS board
front panel, 8-4
function, 8-2
indicator, 8-4
interface, 8-5
principle, 8-3
GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE board

i-4
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
slots, 8-2
GXCSA board
GXCSB board
front panel, 9-3

function, 9-1
indicator, 9-4
interface, 9-4
principle, 9-2
slots, 9-1
H
IDL4 board
front panel, 7-41
function, 7-40
interface, 7-42
principle, 7-41
slots, 7-40
IDQ1 board
front panel, 7-41
function, 7-40
interface, 7-42
principle, 7-41
slots, 7-40
indicator
alarm cut indicator, A-3
board hardware indicator, A-2
board software indicator, A-2
cabinet, 2-3
cabinet (summary table), A-1
Ethernet indicator, A-3
Ethernet port indicator, A-3
power monitoring indicator, A-3
service activation indicator, A-2
service alarm indicator, A-2
indicator/alarm concatenating cable between OSN
subracks, 10-15
interface switching & bridging board
TSB8, 5-32
mapping relation between terminals and PIUs, 2-4

MR2 board
slots, 9-7
MR2A/MR2B/MR2C
MR2A/MR2B/MR2C board
front panel, 9-9
function, 9-7
indicator, 9-10
interface, 9-10
principle, 9-8
MST4 board
front panel, 7-48
function, 7-45
indicator, 7-48
interface, 7-48
principle, 7-46
slots, 7-45
MU04. see also SPQ4
MU04 board
front panel, 6-4
function, 6-2
interface, 6-4
principle, 6-2
slots, 6-1
Multi-service transparent transmission processing board
MST4, 7-45
J1. see path trace byte
N1PIU board
front panel, 9-50
principle, 9-48
L12S board
front panel, 6-32
L75S board
front panel, 6-32
L75S/L12S board
function, 6-31
slots, 6-31
LC/PC optical interface, 10-3
LWX board

optical add/drop multiplexing board
MR2A/MR2B/MR2C, 9-7
optical booster & pre-amplifier
BPA, 9-12
optical booster amplifier
BA2, 9-12
orderwire processing board

i-5
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
PIU board
function, 9-48
slots, 9-48
PL1 board
front panel, 6-32
function, 6-31
indicator, 6-33
interface, 6-33
principle, 6-32
slots, 6-31
PL3 board
front panel, 6-13
function, 6-11
indicator, 6-15
interface, 6-15
principle, 6-12
slots, 6-11
PL3/PD3 board
1:N TPS protection, 6-15
PL3A board
front panel, 6-13
function, 6-11
indicator, 6-15
interface, 6-15
principle, 6-12
slots, 6-11
power consumption
board (summary table), C-1
power distribution unit
appearance, 2-4
power interface
COA, 9-22
power interface board
PIU, 9-48
power monitoring indicator, A-3
PQ1 board
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500B, 6-29
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 2500, 6-28
front panel, 6-24
function, 6-22
indicator, 6-25
principle, 6-23
slots, 6-22
PQ1/PQM board
PQM board
EOW, 9-30
OU08. see also SEP1
OU08 board
front panel, 5-35
interface, 5-36
slots, 5-32
P
path trace byte, 5-5
PD1 board
1:N TPS protection for OptiX OSN 1500A, 6-35
front panel, 6-32
function, 6-31
indicator, 6-33
interface, 6-33
principle, 6-32
slots, 6-31
PD1/PL1 board
PD3 board
front panel, 6-13
function, 6-11
indicator, 6-15
interface, 6-15
principle, 6-12
slots, 6-11
PD3/PL3 board
PGND power cable, 10-5
pin assignment
1/2-channel clock transfer cable, 10-46
120 E1 cable, 10-36, 10-38
75 E1 cable, 10-31, 10-33
alarm concatenating cable between OSN subrack and
clock cable, 10-44
indicator/alarm concatenation cable between OSN
subracks, 10-16
serial 14/F&f cable, 10-23
subrack power cable, 10-8, 10-10

i-6
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
principle, 5-29
slots, 5-27
front panel, 6-24

function, 6-22
indicator, 6-25
principle, 6-23
slots, 6-22
PROG. see board software indicator
PWRA/B/C. see power monitoring indicator
S
SAP board
front panel, 9-43
function, 9-30
principle, 9-34
slots, 9-30
SC/PC optical interface, 10-3
SCC
power monitoring module, 8-18
SCC board
communication module, 8-17
control module, 8-17
front panel, 8-18
function, 8-16
indicator, 8-20
interface, 8-21
principle, 8-17
slots, 8-16
switch, 8-19
SEI board
front panel, 9-43
function, 9-30
principle, 9-35
slots, 9-30
SEP1 board
front panel, 5-35
function, 5-33
indicator, 5-35
interface, 5-36
principle, 5-34
slots, 5-32
serial 14/F&f cable, 10-22
service activation indicator, A-2
service alarm indicator, A-2
SF16 board
front panel, 5-10
function, 5-7
indicator, 5-10
interface, 5-11
principle, 5-8
slots, 5-7
signal label byte, 5-5
Q
Q1PIU board
front panel, 9-51
R
R1PIU board
front panel, 9-52
principle, 9-49
R1PIUA board
front panel, 9-52
R1SL1 board
front panel, 5-29
function, 5-28
indicator, 5-30
interface, 5-30
principle, 5-29
slots, 5-27
R1SL1/R1SLQ1 board
R1SL4 board
front panel, 5-29
function, 5-28
indicator, 5-30
interface, 5-30
principle, 5-29
slots, 5-27
R1SL4/R1SLD4 board
R1SLD1 board
function, 5-28
R1SLD4 board
front panel, 5-29
indicator, 5-30
interface, 5-30
principle, 5-29
slots, 5-27
R1SLQ1 board
front panel, 5-29
function, 5-28
indicator, 5-30
interface, 5-30

i-7
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
size
cabinet, 2-6
OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23
OptiX OSN 2500 subrack, 3-17
SL1 board
front panel, 5-24
function, 5-22
indicator, 5-24
interface, 5-25
principle, 5-22
slots, 5-21
SL16 board
front panel, 5-10
function, 5-7
indicator, 5-10
interface, 5-11
principle, 5-8
slots, 5-7
SL4 board
front panel, 5-17
function, 5-15
indicator, 5-18
interface, 5-18
principle, 5-16
slots, 5-15
SL64 board
front panel, 5-4
function, 5-1
indicator, 5-4
interface, 5-4
principle, 5-2
slots, 5-1
technical parameters, 5-5
SLD4 board
front panel, 5-17
function, 5-15
interface, 5-18
principle, 5-16
slots, 5-15
slot distribution
for OptiX OSN 1500A board, 3-20
for OptiX OSN 1500B board, 3-27
for OptiX OSN 2500 board, 3-13
for OptiX OSN 2500 REG board, 3-18
for OptiX OSN 3500 board, 3-4

OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11
OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3
slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-26
slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-13
slot mapping table for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3
SLQ1 board
front panel, 5-24
function, 5-22
indicator, 5-24
interface, 5-25
principle, 5-22
slots, 5-21
SLQ4 board
front panel, 5-17
function, 5-15
interface, 5-18
principle, 5-16
slots, 5-15
SLT1 board
front panel, 5-24
function, 5-22
indicator, 5-24
interface, 5-25
principle, 5-22
slots, 5-21
SPQ4 board
front panel, 6-4
function, 6-2
indicator, 6-4
interface, 6-4
principle, 6-2
slots, 6-1
SRV. see service alarm indicator
STAT. see board hardware indicator
STM-1 electrical processing board
SEP1, 5-32
STM-1 interface board
EU08, 5-32
MU04, 6-1
OU08, 5-32
STM-1 optical processing board
SL1 board, 5-21
SLQ1 board, 5-21
SLT1 board, 5-21
STM-1 optical processing board (half-slot)

i-8
OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Index
COA, 9-23
TPS protection
1:1, 7-17
1:N, 6-5, 6-15
TSB8. see also SEP1
TSB8 board
front panel, 5-35
function, 5-33
slots, 5-32
R1SL1 board, 5-27

R1SLQ1 board, 5-27
STM-1/E4 processing board
SPQ4, 6-1
SL16 board, 5-7
SL4 board, 5-15
SLD4 board, 5-15
SLQ4 board, 5-15
STM-4 optical processing board (half-slot)
R1SL4 board, 5-27
R1SLD4 board, 5-27
STM-64 processing board
SL64 board, 5-1
subrack
size for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23
size for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31
size for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17
size for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-19
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-25
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-11
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 2500 REG, 3-18
slot distribution for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-3
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 1500B, 3-31
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 2500, 3-17
technical parameter for OptiX OSN 3500, 3-9
weight for OptiX OSN 1500, 3-31
weight for OptiX OSN 1500A, 3-23
subrack power cable, 10-8
subrack structure
OptiX OSN 2500, 3-10
OptiX OSN 3500, 3-2
system auxiliary interface board
AUX, 9-30
SAP, 9-30
SEI, 9-30
system control & communication board
GSCC, 8-16
SCC, 8-16
system control and clock unit for REG
CRG, 8-22
U
uninterruptible power modules
UPM, 9-55
UPM, 2-4
front panel, 9-57
function, 9-56
indicator, 9-57
interface, 9-57
precaution, 9-58
priciple, 9-56
UXCS board
front panel, 8-4
function, 8-2
indicator, 8-4
interface, 8-5
principle, 8-3
UXCSA board
W
wavelength conversion board
LWX, 9-1
weight
board (summary table), C-1
cabinet, 2-6
OptiX OSN 1500A subrack, 3-23
OptiX OSN 2500subrack, 3-17
OptiX OSN 3500subrack, 3-9
XCE board
front panel, 8-4
function, 8-2
indicator, 8-4
interface, 8-5
tail fiber, 10-1

technical parameter
120 E1 cable, 10-37, 10-39
cabinet, 2-6
OptiX OSN 1500 A, 3-23
technical specification

i-9

OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

OSN 3500 2500 1500 Hardware Description Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

1 Equipment Architecture ...............................................................................

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500 ......................................................

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500 ...........................................................

4 Board Classification and List ......................................................................

4.1 Board Classification ................................................................................

4.1.3 Data Processing Boards ................................................................

5 SDH Boards ...................................................................................................

5.1 SL64 .......................................................................................................

5.6 SEP1/EU08/OU08/TSB8 ........................................................................

6 PDH Boards ...................................................................................................

6.1 SPQ4/MU04/TSB8 .................................................................................

6.4.7 Technical Parameters ....................................................................

7 Data Processing Boards ..............................................................................

7.1 EGT2/EFT8/EFT4/EFF8/ETF8 ...............................................................

7.6 MST4 ......................................................................................................

8 Cross-Connect and System Control Boards ..............................................

8.1 GXCS/EXCS/UXCS/XCE .......................................................................

9 Other Boards .................................................................................................

9.1 LWX ........................................................................................................

9.1.3 Front Panel ....................................................................................

9.6.10 Technical Parameters ..................................................................

10.1 Fiber Jumper ........................................................................................

10.4.1 OAM Serial Port Cable .................................................................

A Indicator Description for Equipment and Board .......................................

A.1 Cabinet Indicator Description .................................................................

B Board Version Description ..........................................................................

B.1 Board Version List ..................................................................................

C Power Consumption and Weight ................................................................

D Abbreviations and Acronyms .....................................................................

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500 Intelligent Optical Transmission

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Copyright 2005 Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Initial field trial release

The manual style is modified.

Descriptions of the EGT2, EMR0, EFF8, ADL4, ADQ1,

Descriptions of the ETS8, SF64, and COA are added.

1. The hardware description manuals of the OptiX OSN

Fix several bugs in the manual of the previous version. Delete

Updates in Manual Version 1.31

Updates in Manual Version 1.30

Updates in Manual Version 1.21

Updates in Manual Version 1.20

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

Huawei Technologies Proprietary

OptiX OSN 3500/2500/1500

1.1 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 3500

1.2 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 2500

1.3 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500A

1.4 Architecture of the OptiX OSN 1500B

2.2 Cabinet Configuration

2.2.1 Cabinet Indicators

2.2.2 Power Distribution Unit

2.2.3 Other Configuration

2.3 Technical Parameters

3.1 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 3500

3.1.2 Slot Distribution

3.1.3 Boards and the Corresponding Slots

3.1.4 Technical Parameters

3.2 Subrack for the OptiX OSN 2500

3.2.2 Slot Distribution